JP6646307B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs an effect during a variable display of a symbol that notifies a determination result as to whether or not to execute a special game.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. There are various effects that are expected to be a big hit (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-163824

  By the way, the effect performed by the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily a highly entertaining effect, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

A gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention for solving the above-described problems,
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol on predetermined symbol display means, and then stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect,
The effect control means,
In the predetermined image display means, the effect symbols are variably displayed along with the change display of the special symbols, and the effect symbols indicating the results of the determination are stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbols,
The rendering symbol is identification information that can identify the rendering symbol from other rendering symbols, a first decoration image added to the identification information, and a second decoration image that is displayed as a background of the first decoration image and the identification information. And two decorative images,
The effect control means,
Prior to the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination being stopped and displayed, it is possible to cause the effect symbol to be pseudo-stop-displayed,
A first display control and a second display control subsequent to the first display control can be executed when the effect symbol that has been variably displayed is pseudo-stop-displayed;
The first display control is configured to rotate the identification information with a change direction in which the effect symbol has changed as an axial direction, swing the second decoration image in a direction different from the change direction, and (1) Display control for causing a decorative image to perform a predetermined effect operation,
The second display control, the identification information, the first decoration image, and to the second decoration image, Ri display control der to perform the rocking operation in common with each other,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a first reach effect and a second reach effect performed after the first reach effect during a single variation display of the special symbol,
During the first reach effect, the first reach effect is executed in a state in which a reach by the effect symbol having the identification information, the first decoration image, and the second decoration image is established. ,
When the second reach effect is started, the identification information, the first decoration image, and the second decoration image constituting the effect symbol are rotated with the change direction as the axial direction, and the identification information is rotated. And performing a separation effect of separating the first decoration image and the second decoration image,
When the separation effect is executed, the first decoration image and the second decoration image separated from the identification information are deleted,
During the second reach effect, the second reach image is not provided with the first decorative image and the second decorative image, and in a state where the reach by the effect symbol configured with the identification information is established, the second reach image is displayed. reach demonstration is executed is characterized in Rukoto.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining effect.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of an example of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3 and is a view showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers which a microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. it is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of a general-purpose operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 operation | movement process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 operation | movement process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. 7 is a flowchart of a special figure 2 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 1; It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hitting game). 9 is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 2; It is a flowchart of a reserved ball number process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is a table | surface which shows the symbol type of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of state A. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect symbol game effect in state B. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode C, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of effect mode C. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect symbol game effect in effect mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit change in effect mode D, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit game in effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetch effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect when a specific period is started. It is a figure showing an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen from before the start of the mode selection period during the big hit game to after the start. (A) is a table showing types of second effect patterns (battle effect patterns in effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing types of third effect patterns (battle effect patterns in effect mode D). It is a figure showing an example of a display of a notice image in effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a preview image. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the effect performed at the time of the low certainty low base state. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of the production performed in the low certainty low base state. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of the production performed in the low certainty low base state. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the example of the production performed in the low certainty low base state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the chance up during SPSP reach. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of a rank-up effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of a rank up effect. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of a rank up effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot reliability of various notice effects, such as a rank-up effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of the 1st countdown effect. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of the 1st countdown effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the feature of the first countdown effect. It is a screen figure showing the 1st example of the 2nd countdown effect. It is a screen diagram showing a second specific example of the second countdown effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining features of various countdown effects. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode in a low-probability low base state. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of the production concerning the large chance production generation zone. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of the production concerning the large chance production generation zone. It is a screen figure showing the example of the 1st group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display mode of each icon and the jackpot reliability. It is a screen figure showing the example of the 2nd group notice. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of each group notice. It is a screen diagram which shows the 1st example of a button image change effect. It is a screen figure which shows the 2nd specific example of a button image change effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of special reach production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of special reach production. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the example of special reach production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the jackpot reliability of special reach production. (A) is a partial front view of the gaming machine for explaining the speaker lamp, and (B) is a partial front view of the game board for explaining the first starting port lamp. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the characteristic of a light emission effect. It is a time chart which shows the example of the production control concerning a light emission production. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the icon which can be acquired by a mini-character battle effect. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of a mini character battle production. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of a mini character battle production. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the example of a mini character battle production. It is a screen figure (the 1) which shows the example of the change display of the effect symbol. It is a screen figure (the 2) which shows the example of the change display of the effect symbol. It is a screen figure (the 3) which shows the example of the change display of the effect symbol. It is a screen figure (the 4) which shows the example of change display of the effect symbol.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, when the accompanying per symbol completion of variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, a predetermined amount of game profit to the player (e.g., winning balls) pachinko game machine capable of performing per game that can impart An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 on which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall island facility. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. The front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end (the left side in FIG. 1) in the up-down direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 around the one side end. It is configured. In addition, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  Further, the front frame 51 has a firing handle 60 for firing game balls with a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and stores the game balls and supplies the stored game balls to the launch device side. A high-strength ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, a front effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to) that can be operated by the player during the execution of the game effect executed as the game progresses, etc. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The effect buttons to be used can be properly used for the plurality of effect buttons according to the type of the game effect. Note that the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and may be any as long as it can detect an input from a player, or an input detecting means (for example, a player directly touching the button portion to make an input). , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.) or a non-contact type input detecting means (a photoelectric type, etc.) for detecting that a part of the player's body has approached and performing an input. Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decoration frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily recognized by the player. And is installed so as to be inclined toward the outside. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described below, execute / non-execute a game, the state of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game effects (characters and staging patterns, etc.), demonstration effects, and information related to games (acquired payout information, number of rounds, number of consecutive play, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability and explanation of game effects, etc.) , Information on the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information among these pieces of information. The image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information when displaying different information among these information. There are times when you do. Also, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the other one displays different information. May be displayed. Note that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

  The image display device 7 is provided in an area inside the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display apparatus 71 and the third image display apparatus 72 are provided in an area outside the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Have been. Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as axes. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main frame 52 are opened around the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 is provided with a pachinko machine. This is a configuration for preventing the gaming machine 1 from being damaged by colliding with a hall facility (ball rental machine, inter-chamber facility, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixed to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball fired by operating the firing handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are protruded. Further, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent a game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 including a liquid crystal display device is provided. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an "effect symbol display portion") in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side. ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low-accuracy low-base state, high-accuracy low-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy high-base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game. The effect design 8L is also referred to as “left design”, the effect design 8C is also referred to as “middle design”, and the effect design 8R is also referred to as “right design”.

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low-precision low-base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-probability low base state, the frequency of entering game balls into the starting port (the second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether a special symbol is hit or not. The determination probabilities (the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) are low probabilities (also referred to as “predetermined probabilities”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. (more than twice) are set (all out change 10 minutes). For this reason, in the normal state, the left game area 3A (the second game area) is displayed rather than the game ball being fired in the right game area 3B (the second game area) and the second special symbol is variably displayed by entering the second starting port 21. Write play a game which variably displays the first special symbol to be fired game ball into a game area) was ball entrance to the first start hole 20 is advantageous to the player. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the first special symbol (effect symbol) is the main game state in which the variable display is performed. For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 4) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display section" and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section"). The result of the symbol change display (the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. In addition, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also referred to simply as “hit / fail judgment” or “first hit / fail judgment”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also referred to as “hit / fail judgment execution means” or “first hit / fail judgment execution means”.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (zolo) such as “777” (also referred to as “big hit symbol”). Say). In the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a special chance design such as “135” or a special hit design such as “3 ★ 3” (also referred to as a “small hit design”) is produced. Stop and display the symbol. In addition, when the small hit occurs, instead of the mode in which the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol having the same mode may be stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol and the off symbol. Also, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" or "373" is stopped and the effect symbol is displayed in a different symbol (the "off symbol"). ”). Thus, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) by looking at the effect symbol stopped and displayed. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol correct / improper judgment by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. It is understood by looking at the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as the aspect of the effect symbol change display, for example, an aspect of scrolling display in up, down, left, right, diagonal directions, or the like, an aspect of effect display using only the first effect symbol display section 7b, or a first effect symbol display section 7b In addition to the above, there is a mode in which an effect is displayed by using one or both of the second effect symbol display section 71a and the third effect symbol display section 72a. In addition, in addition to this, a mode in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a may be provided.

  In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect design game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, the game effect is executed in accordance with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect), a demonstration effect for customer waiting, and the like are displayed. In the effect design game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to the effect design such as a numeral, an effect image other than the effect design such as a background image or a character image is displayed. As will be described later in detail, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play a game, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is performed or not. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, a first special symbols and in parallel both the second special symbol (simultaneously) the gaming machine capable of varying display, a game of such type Machine is also referred to as a “simultaneous variation machine (parallel variation machine)”.

  In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display unit) for displaying the first effect suspension 9a according to the number of first special figure suspensions described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure holds stored, which will be described later. The first special figure reservation displayed on a first special figure reservation display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later according to the display mode (the number of displays) of the first production reservation 9a or the second production reservation 9b in the production suspension display area. And the number of stored second special figure reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b can be easily shown to the player. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In some cases, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game balls can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides them to the stage section 11. The game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first starting port 20 described later with a higher possibility than game balls not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an electric decoration member (a board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to a game state, and which forms characters, figures, and the like is arranged. I have.

  A movable decorative member 14 operable in accordance with the game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In Figure 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, for example, along with the execution of relatively per the likely game effects, the movable decorative member 14 falls down (predetermined The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player can enhance the interest in the game and increase the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, fixed winning device 19 comprising a first start hole 20 of the non-variable type ball entrance easiness of the game ball is not changed is provided. Based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for a special symbol hit determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit determination related to the first special symbol ( The first special symbol determination is performed, and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination.

  Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a general-purpose starting port, a passing port, an entrance port, a specific starting port) through which game balls can pass (can enter). Mouth). Game balls that have entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 pass through the gate 28 and flow down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also called a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, the present gate is the gate 28 and also the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is usually obtained, and when a predetermined condition (variation condition) is established, the normal In addition to executing the symbol win / fail determination (also referred to as "second win / fail determination"), the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol win / fail determination. When the hit ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs a normal symbol hit / fail determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 is referred to as a “hit / hit determination execution unit”. It is also referred to as "second validity determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the condition for executing the big hit game is satisfied (executing the big hit game). (Also referred to as a possible state or a jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, a control process for a normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. Also, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot waiting state), the jackpot game in the standby mode is started, and the predetermined jackpot ( A round game in which the first winning port 30) is in an open state (a state in which a ball can be entered) starts.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first area having a first special winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entrance”) is provided. The first special winning device 31 includes an opening and closing member 32, and opens and closes the first special winning opening 30 by operating the opening and closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (elongated plate) game ball path on the upper surface. In a closed state, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 is closed, and a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first special winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted in the direction of the back of the game board 3 so that the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thus, when the closing member 32 is open, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the first special winning opening 30 becomes to be ball entrance to the first bonus prize hole 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when opened (at the time of opening), smoothly plays the flowing game balls in the first large winning opening 30. When the ball enters the winning opening 30 and is in the closed state (at the time of closing), the flowing game ball can be guided in an arbitrary direction (a second starting opening 21 described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. The first special winning opening 30, only game ball becomes possible ball entrance when closing member 32 is open. That is, the first large winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is configured such that the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes a non-entering state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter, and an entry in which game balls enter. It can be changed to a ball possible state (open state).

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, there is no change in the ease of entry of the game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of a game ball into the third starting port 26, a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol ( together with a second special symbol spruce determination) is performed, the second special symbol starts displaying variation, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of spruce determination after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the game ball passage branches below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage in which the third starting port 26 is provided, the second starting port 31 and the second starting ball 31. A lower game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26 or the like. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter a ball, a large hit is made in a left hit game (a so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is executed in a right hit game. During the big hit game, the game ball is put into the third starting port 26 (reserved), and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the big hit game ends.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream of) the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entry of the game ball is changed. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port” or a “variable starting port”) having a second starting port 21 is provided. Based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (the The second special symbol starts to fluctuate and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the determination.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “open / close member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and disables game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. I have. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It is not necessary that the ball cannot be entered.

  The movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (elongated plate) game ball path on the upper surface, similar to the opening / closing member 32. In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and the movable ball 23 is closed. game ball is a can pass through the movable member 23 top surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23, from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the paper right to left) are formed in an inclined shape. Thus, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start hole 21, without ball entrance to the second start hole 21, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The movable member 23 is driven by the second start hole solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), that the movable member 23 retracts in the game board 3 backside direction (the game board and the vertical direction), to form a game ball passage The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. As described above, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when opened (at the time of opening), the game ball that has flowed down. The game ball smoothly flows into the second starting port 21 and, when in the closed state (at the time of closing), allows the flowing game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning opening 35 described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  In the game area 3 on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 and below (the downstream of) the second starting port 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening and closing member 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening and closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has an upper surface formed as a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (a long plate shape). In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 and opens and closes the opening. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper). Thereby, when the opening and closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the direction of the back surface of the game board 3 (in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that has been used disappears from the entrance of the second big winning opening 35. Thus, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 enters the second special winning opening 35. As described above, the opening / closing member 37 for opening and closing the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (at the time of opening). Smoothly into the second special winning opening 35, and guides the flowing game balls in the closed state (when closed) to an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second large winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 37 to enter a non-enterable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an enterable state in which a game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball possible state (open state).

  Further, a plurality of (three) general entrance holes 27 are provided in a game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3. In this manner, the game area 3 where various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into A hitting method in which a game ball is fired so that a game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method in which a game ball is fired so that a game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the normal state (low-probability low-base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to enter the first starting port 20 by left-handing. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly based on entering the first starting port 20 by the left-handed hit (first special symbol hit / fail judgment).

  On the other hand, when a hit is determined in the hit determination (first special symbol hit / fail determination) based on the ball entry into the first starting port 20, after the big hit game and the big hit game (special game) end (low-precision high base state or high accuracy The low base state) is a game in which the player hits the gate 28, the first winning port 30, the second starting port 21, or the second winning port 35 by right-handing. In other words, the jackpot game and the low-probability high-base state (state B) or the high-probability low-base state (state C) mainly involve entering the second starting port 21 by right-handing (second special symbol hit / fail judgment). It becomes a right-handed game. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first special winning opening 30, the second special winning opening 35, and the general receiving opening 27, the respective starting openings are provided. , A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” and “game profits”) are paid out (given). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the ball entering the first large winning opening 30 is determined by the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35. More than the number (the amount of game profit) is set. Specifically, the first special winning opening 30 pays out 15 winning balls for one entering ball, and the second special winning opening 35 provides 10 winning balls for one entering ball. Prize balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at a lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display unit 40 has a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for changing and displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display unit for changing and displaying the second special symbol. And a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for changing and stopping and displaying a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information"). In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special figure suspension display 43a that displays the number of pieces of the validity determination information (first special figure reservation) related to the first special symbol, and the validity determination information (second number) related to the second special symbol. A second special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored (two special figure hold) and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included. ing.

  The main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination has been hit, and a first special symbol hit / fail determination or a second special symbol hit / fail determination. When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a launch direction of the game ball, that is, a right strike. A firing direction indicator 47 indicating whether the state should be left or left should be included. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The change display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively called a special figure reservation display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the first symbol 20 or the second symbol is displayed by the special symbol (stop symbol) stopped (derived). The result of the hit judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entry into 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit / fail determination. In the case where the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the stop pattern is an open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol stopped and displayed. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning port 30 or the second big winning port 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p” and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (4R second big hit) occurs, the four LEDs of “jnkl” are turned on, and the remaining LEDs are turned off. In the case of disconnection, two LEDs of “lo” can be turned on, and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a" to "h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. As in the case of the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is set to a different display mode according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. Each LED may be turned on so that light flows repeatedly.

  Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and effect symbols (display results of variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as “hit style. , "Specific Mode", "Specific Display Mode" or "Specific Display Result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "Off" or "Non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is referred to as “small hit”. It is also referred to as "hit mode." Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display), and the special symbol display 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various kinds of information such as a random number for determining a special symbol hit / fail (such as “acquisition information”) are entered based on the entering ball. ), And the obtained various information is temporarily stored in a special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. More specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"), If the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a second special figure reservation (also referred to as “second acquired information”). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also generally referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is exhausted when the special symbol change display based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Extinguishing the special figure suspension means determining a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like corresponding to the special figure suspension and executing a special symbol variation display for indicating the determination result. Accordingly, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol change display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of entering the ball, that is, the respective special change running and display of symbols, either during the execution of the special game is based on the special symbol spruce determination, a maximum of a predetermined number (four each), reserves the right special symbol spruce determination for the ball entrance (pending ) Can be.

  The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special map reservation display 43a is configured by two LEDs of “uv”, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special map reservation, the first special map reservation display 43a is provided. Displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1 In this case, the display mode may be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. When the number of reservations is 2, a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as "u.multidot.v". When the number of reservations is 3, a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u.multidot.v.multidot." When the number of reservations is four (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green, such as "u v v," to provide a display mode. Further, the second special figure reservation display 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”. By controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the second special figure reservation display 43b is displayed. It displays the number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: turned off, ●: turned on red, ▲: turned on green), is used. 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Normally, the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the ordinary symbol display 42, the ordinary symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time, then is stopped and displayed, and the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The ordinary symbol stopped and displayed is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment. When the stop-displayed ordinary symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (hit ordinary symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state (“specific game”). Is also performed). The means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game executing means (specific game executing means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of “st”, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol pass / fail determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the hit ordinary symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is stopped and displayed as "s @ t @" (for example, ■: turned on, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-usual ordinary design in which only the t LED is turned on, such as "s @ t @", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, based on the passage, and acquires the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a general drawing reservation in a general drawing storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of general drawing reservations that can be stored in the general drawing storage unit 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general figure holding stored in the general figure holding storage unit 86 is exhausted when it becomes possible to change and display the ordinary symbol based on the general figure holding. The term “extension of the ordinary symbol holding” means that a random number for determining whether or not the ordinary symbol corresponds to the ordinary symbol holding is determined, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol or during the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (reserve) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is accepted for the passage, with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose display 44. Specifically, the general-purpose reservation display 44 includes two LEDs “qr”, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of general-purpose reservations. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the hold number is 1 In this case, the display mode can be set such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as in the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (a “main control unit”, a “main control unit” A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", a "sub-control unit", or an "effect control unit") for performing control relating to an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, a game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that controls the payout of the game, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect display 102, a third effect hold display 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling display of the fourth effect suspension display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided substantially at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Above the main control board case, A storage case such as an image control board that stores the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the storage case such as the image control board. Is provided. On the lower left side of the main control board case, a payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided. On the right side, a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be provided externally. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 85 (the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and the general figure reservation storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, and The general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detection means”.

  The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first winning port solenoid 33, and a second winning port solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, and a A drawing hold display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a launch direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, the display control of the main display 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout apparatus 120 for paying out a prize ball or a lending ball, and a card unit 135, and is also connected to a firing control board 111 (also referred to as a “fire control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes the firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of FIG. 1), and when a player performs a predetermined ball lending operation, the inserted prepaid card (game) This allows a ball to be lent based on information stored in a value storage medium or the like.

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of gaming balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives to pay out prize balls or pays out rental balls. The payout game balls are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the contact of the player with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 of the firing handle 60 Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the driving of the firing motor 113 is controlled so that the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, an unillustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating unit is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 5, on the sub-control board 90, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. I have. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another substrate or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be provided externally.

  An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 sends a command to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display device 102, third effect hold display device 103a, and fourth effect hold display device 103b Perform control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, and symbols (including effect designs, reserve designs, and the like), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a fluctuation display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display and the corresponding special LED is turned on or off or the color indicates the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination). To stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold display 103a and the fourth effect hold display 103b are also each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the third effect holding display 103a is displayed on the number of holdings displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c and the first special figure holding display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of held items as the number of held items. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is controlled to be displayed in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. You.

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (production design display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (production design display unit) to display the display screen 7a (production design display). By covering a part or substantially the entire part, the effect design 8, the first effect suspension display unit 9c, or the second effect suspension display unit 9d may become invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, In addition, a fourth effect hold display 103b is provided. In addition, the display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect suspension display 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display 103b is such that the visual recognition is not hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is always visible. Has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sound, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The sound data such as the sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute the audio control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and the ROM may store sound data. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on a command received from the main control board 80, and is configured to emit light pattern data (light / light off, light color, etc., for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5). , Lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the operation pattern data thus obtained. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.) and a second effect button 63b. The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, control related to special symbol hit / fail judgment in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are “big hits”, “small hits”, and “missing”. At the time of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of “missing”, the “missing symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a “special game” in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed is executed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called "small hit game".

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and a hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specified result) of the special symbol hit / fail determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depend on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specified result, the second specified result, the third specified result, or another specified result. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may be different depending on the hit type, and the game profit amount that can be obtained by the special game is different, and the game state after the end of the special game is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R No. There are "5 big hits", "2R sixth big hits", "2R seventh big hits", and "2R eighth big hits". In the “15R third big hit”, the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is 15 times. The “4R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit” have the number of times (round number) of opening of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) being four. The “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30). Two times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is all opened, and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first special winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit winning prize opening (variable winning opening for big hit)".

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” indicate the game state after the end of the big hit game. To the high probability state (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as “probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)”. This high probability state (probable change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. The “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” shift the game state after the end of the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit” are the “second special symbol time saving” in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time after the end of the big hit game. Activate the function and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the game characteristics in the high-accuracy low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, the second special game is performed. This is a period in which a symbol hit is determined, a small hit is generated, and the number of game balls can be increased in a period (big hit) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by frequently causing small hits in the high-probability and low-base state between the big hits, it is expected that a large number of game balls will be acquired in a short time due to the small hits. In other words, this is a period that is advantageous for the player, and is a period in which the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", and "2R eighth big hit" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generating function" after the end of the big hit game. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd big hit" and "2R 8th big hit", the low-probability high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol change display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol change display is completed based on 100 executions, the gaming state is set to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In the case of “2R seventh big hit”, the low-probability high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol is displayed 50 times. When the special symbol change display is completed 50 times, the game state is set to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-probability and high-base state, the right special game is performed in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In the “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, the “second special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” are activated after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state. In the case of “2R fifth big hit”, the “second special symbol time saving function” continues until the next big hit occurs, and the “high base generating function” determines whether the next big hit occurs or the special symbol changes The process ends when the display is executed 50 times. As described above, the “probable change function” is continued until the next big hit occurs. In other words, in the case of "2R 5th big hit", after the big hit game ends, until the variation display of the special symbol elapses 50 times, the state is set to the high-accuracy high base state. , The game state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state.

  In the high-accuracy high base state, similar to the low-precision high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, and the game is expected in the next big hit. As described above, the high-probability low-base state is a period that is advantageous for a player who can expect to obtain many game balls in a short time due to small hits by frequent small hits as described above. is there. It is assumed that more game balls can be obtained in the high-accuracy low-base state than in the high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed after the big hit game ends, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state) than before.

  In addition, "2R sixth big hit" is, after the big hit game ends, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol elapses 100 times, it is in the high-accuracy high base state, and if the big hit does not occur even after 100 times, This is the same as “2R fifth big hit” except that the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state, that is, the period in which the gaming state changes is different. In addition, the timing when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state is set earlier for “2R fifth big hit” than for “2R sixth big hit”. Therefore, it can be said that “2R fifth big hit” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than “2R sixth big hit”.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit) related to “2R fifth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit” are completed. By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, and the like) in the certainty-based state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to the non-report state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not reported (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R fifth big hit”, the game state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, and the “2R In the case of "seventh big hit", the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, so that the player is not notified. In any state, regardless of the game state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low-base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit) related to “2R sixth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit” are completed. By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to the non-report state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not reported (it is difficult to recognize).

  If the type of the big hit is “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed, and “2R In the case of "8th big hit", the gaming state becomes the low-probability low-basis state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the change display of the special symbol has elapsed. In any state, regardless of the game state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low-base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit) related to “2R fifth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit” are completed. The high-probability base state, the high-probability base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit”, and the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit” By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-probability high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is in. Difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not notified (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R fifth big hit”, the game state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, and the “2R In the case of "seventh big hit", the game state becomes the low-probability low-base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times. In addition, when the type of the big hit is “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (an advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of the change display of the special symbol, In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low-accuracy low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed. For this reason, in the non-notification state, the player plays a game in the non-notification state, expecting to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state when the special symbol change display is performed 50 times. , Will increase the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected not to shift to the low-accuracy low-base state but to at least continue to the high-base state (that is, to continue the non-notification state). I do. If the non-notification state continues after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, the state will shift to the high-accuracy low base state. Playing with the expectation that the game will be played will enhance the entertainment interest of the game. As described above, in the non-notification state, the points for increasing the player's sense of expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long time.

  In addition, the number of small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / falling determination is that the number of times the large winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is opened is six times, and one (and one) compared to other large hits. (Total) opening time is also set short. Specifically, opening is performed for a total of 1.8 seconds by opening six times in 0.3 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R third big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, and the like), the number of the game balls that can be acquired by one small hit game is set. However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute the small hit games a plurality of times and acquire more game balls. In the case of small hits, the second special winning opening 35 is opened, and the first special winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second special winning opening 35 is also referred to as a “small winning large winning opening (variable winning opening for small hits)”. In the case of a small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times of opening. Also, based on the occurrence of a small hit, the probability change function does not operate, and if the game state at the time of the small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it is also set to a high probability state after the end of the small hit game, and when the small hit occurs Is a low-probability state, the low-probability state is maintained even after the small hitting game is over. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the determination of the success or failure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R third big hit, 5% for the 4R fourth big hit, 5% for the 2R fifth big hit, and 5% for the 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R seventh big hit is 25%, and 2R eighth big hit is 10%. In other words, when the second special symbol time-saving function described later is activated, a hit is determined by a hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the second starting port 21 whose frequency of change is improved (a second special symbol hit / fail determination). It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than in the hit / fail determination (the first special symbol hit / fail determination) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that the big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the ball enters the ball is more likely to be advantageous (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) to the player. I have. Further, the player plays the game in expectation of the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of the high-accuracy low base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit.

  Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is determined based on a "special symbol hit / fail judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / fail judgment information ")". Is determined based on “big hit type determining random numbers (also referred to as“ symbol determining random numbers ”and“ symbol determining information ”)”. As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquisition information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes, in addition to the special symbol success / failure determining random number and the jackpot type determining random number, a “variation pattern”. Random number (also referred to as “variation pattern information”) ”. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is correct as shown in FIG. The normal symbol hit / fail determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / fail determination). Normally, the symbol random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 240.

  Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the functions of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the variation time reduction function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port are activated or inactive. There are a plurality of game states depending on the combination of the states. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol hit / fail determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). In other words, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed by using the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state. The determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of the special symbol variation display being a big hit (stop symbol being a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting the high probability or the low probability as the probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol hit determination is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  Further, a state in which the variation time reducing function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time reduction state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time reduction state”. In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time reduction state. That is, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table determined so that the fluctuation pattern with the shorter fluctuation time is selected more than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective ball entry (a ball that can be stored as the special figure reservation) into the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with a smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as the “second special symbol time reduction function” as shown in FIG. I have. When the second special symbol time reduction function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and causes a game ball to enter the second starting port 21, the second special symbol The symbol correct / non-permissible determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes, 3 minutes for big hits, 2 minutes for small hits), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as a “first condition state”). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls even if the player performs a right-handed game in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game proceeds with the left-hitting game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (in parallel) perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In the state A, even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variation display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be changed and displayed.

  When the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player plays the right-handed game without reducing the number of possessed balls as compared to the left-handed game (maintained or slightly decreased in state B, state C ), It is possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the variable game of the second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time reduction function is also activated during the period in which the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, but the first special symbol time reduction function may not be activated.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (second special symbol time reduction function) for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the ordinary symbol operate in the high base state (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state) in the gaming state, and are operated in the low base state (low-precision low-base state, high-precision state). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol hit / fail determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the “general figure high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger for the state B than in the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). A normal symbol hit / fail judgment (ordinary symbol judgment) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol display 42 is activated, the probability of the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol being a hit (a stopped symbol is an ordinary hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) and opens. The second opening is in an open state during the operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 second. In the present embodiment, the number of times of the opening operation of the opening / closing member 37 is made different between the time of the low base state and the time of the high base state. However, the number of times of the opening operation may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, and the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times in 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be performed six times in 1.0 second, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. In such a case, the opening number increasing function of the variable prize device 22 is also activated.

  In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 of the normal symbol are activated, so that these functions are not activated compared to the low base state. The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as a “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is increased. As described above, in the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

  If the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of times of opening, the lower the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once every 6.0 seconds, and furthermore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the change of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is such that the game ball starts flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21. The time is set such that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state is flowing, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. Further, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is replaced with a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material constituting the ball passage (the material is different). Thereby, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed lower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode of reducing the falling speed, the inclination angle may be reduced, or an obstruction member (a protrusion or the like) for reducing the falling speed may be provided. In this way, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the small hit and the second large winning opening 35 are in the open state (ball entry possible state), the flowing game ball enters the second starting port 21 and enters the second starting port 21. It is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35.

  The high base state may not be where all of the above functions are activated. That is, the activation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize device 22 for the ordinary symbol has a second starting port than when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that the ball 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the special symbol time reduction state. The function of generating such a high base state is called a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the determination of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the determination of the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability low-base state), there is a possibility that a right-handed game is attempted. However, as described above, in the normal state (low-probability low-base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is much longer than the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, the variance display cannot be performed many times, and the game efficiency is extremely poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not being played (non-game state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". ". The “state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-game state)” means that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is “0”. It means that.

  In the high base state such as the high-accuracy high base state and the low-accuracy high base state, and in the high-accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time-saving function, and the right-handed game Game efficiency is improved. In such a case, performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol win / fail determination which is advantageous for the player can advantageously advance the game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right hit is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct.

  In the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 is the same as that in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). Since the variation time of the second special symbol to be changed is changed in a short time, a right-handed game is performed in which the second special symbol determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol determination can be executed. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, the entry into the second starting port 21 is not performed. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of this, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment determines that the small hits (small hit probability: 300/630) that occur with a high probability prevent the game balls from being reduced during the big hits, and rather cause the small hits to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of holding balls by performing (generating multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state), the right-handed game allows the ball to frequently enter the second starting port 21 without greatly reducing the number of balls held. 2 Aim for the next big hit by the special symbol hit / fail judgment. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to one. The sphere does not increase (is maintained). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the right-hitting game balls are set so as to enter the second starting port 21, the high baseball is used as long as the ball does not enter another entry port. If the condition is continued for a long period of time, the ball will be slightly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency by the right-handed game by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, and the possession of the ball in the small hit game is performed. At the same time as increasing the number, the second special symbol is judged to be the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the high-accuracy low-base state lasts), the more small hits are generated. There are many opportunities (to execute a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game state]
As shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area with a gate 28 (start gate 29), a first special winning opening 30, The two starting ports 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in this order in an optimal order. In addition, since the game ball flow-down passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning ports is in the closed state, most (90%) of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B Above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows down the second It flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and flows down to the out opening 34. If there is a winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered game ball is located in the game area downstream therefrom. It has a configuration that does not work.

  By arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second starting port 21 or the like that is opened prevents a game ball from reaching the gate 28. In addition, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of waiting time (a state in which the ordinary symbols do not fluctuate) due to the ordinary symbol holding being “0”. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all right-hit game balls can pass through the gate 28 regardless of the presence or absence of opening of other winning ports. Further, since the game balls that have passed through the gate 28 flow down the right game area to the downstream side as they are, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning port.

  When a right-handed game is performed in the high base state (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state), it is determined whether the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) which is almost a hit, so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing (after one second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21. In other words, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and a normal symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, the game ball passing through the gate reaches the second starting port 21 before reaching the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once in 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closed → 6). 2.0 seconds open → 1 second closed → about 6.0 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are almost (about 80 to 90%) in the second starting port 21. I will enter the ball. When a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed. In the second special symbol success / failure determination, in the high-accuracy high base state, a big hit occurs with a probability of 1/63, a small hit occurs with a probability of 30/63, and a miss occurs with a probability of 32/63.

  First, when the result of the second special symbol right / wrong determination is off, most (approximately 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branched before the second start port 21, without flowing down to the second start port 21. 26, or flows into the out port 34. Thereby, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is continuously executed. Since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a mode according to the big hit type shown in FIG. . In addition, the second special winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game smoothly flows through the first big winning port without being interrupted by another winning port such as the second starting port 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the state shifts to the low base state during the big hit game. Because it is designed to be frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second starting port 21 first and does not enter the second starting port 21. A situation occurs in which only game balls enter the second special winning opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is merely prolonged, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, the game does not proceed smoothly, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, by arranging the first special winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented, and the big hit game can smoothly proceed. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 except during the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is in the open state for most of the period. Therefore, of the game balls flowing down to the second starting port 21, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls enter the second starting port 21 disposed upstream of the second big winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, a small hit occurs, and even if a small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the downstream second winning opening is performed by the second starting port 21 on the upstream side. The ball entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the second special winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although it is unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 are When the second large winning opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 if the second large winning opening 35 is open.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but it is advantageous for the player to advance the game by right-handing because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, a game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is in an open state (normal symbol determination). In the low-base state (high-accuracy low-base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high-base state, and the probability per symbol is usually about half that of the high-base state ( 120/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if a hit occurs, the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21. Becomes Since the probability of a hit is about 1/2, a hit and a miss occur approximately halfway.

  That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, after the game ball passing through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21, The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to three times opening of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between the opening times is 0.1 second), the second starting port 21 is kept open as long as the right-handed game is continued. During the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, it closes, when it hits, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds thereafter, and when it comes off, the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. In the example in which the hit and the miss occur alternately, the second starting port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens three times for 0.9 seconds, and performs the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, it comes off, and it closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and it repeats the cycle of (close 3 seconds → open about 2.7 seconds → close 3 seconds → close 3 seconds → close about 3 seconds 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, a period during which the second start port 21 is in the open state is generated at about 30%, and a period during which the second start port 21 is closed is generated at about 70%. . Accordingly, the high-accuracy low-base state is different from the high-base state in which the period during which the second starting port 21 is open is about 90% and the period during which the second start port 21 is closed is about 10%. It is highly likely that the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 without entering the second starting port 21. . The possibility that the result of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment is a small hit is the same regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low-precision high base state, high-precision high base state) or the high-precision low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, but has the small hit only in the result of the second special symbol hit / not-determined executed in the right-hit game. ing.

  As described above, in the high-accuracy low-base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting port 21) enter the second starting port 21. Without flowing, it flows down to the second big winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. Thereby, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 downstream of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. State. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). The game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21. If the ball starts in the second starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35, and a small hit game As a result, the ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the open state.

  The prize balls based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35 are set to 10 prize balls for one entering ball, so that the ball is entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of holding balls during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state is continued until at least the next big hit occurs by the special symbol hit / fail determination (only the second special symbol hit / fail determination is performed as long as the right-handed game is continued). Is longer, the player can increase the number of balls held. In the present embodiment, an average of about 20 prize balls (two entering balls) can be obtained by one small hitting game. By generating this small hitting game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it becomes possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 by 10 times). In addition, by this, as a total acquired ball of the “ren-so period” in which the right-handed game is continued, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added in addition to the acquired ball of the big hit game, and a larger amount of the game ball can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for the big hit (only for the big hit), and the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of these) from the second starting port 21 are for the small hit ( It is said to be a special winning jackpot for small hits. In addition, by arranging the second big winning opening 35 which is a big winning opening for small hits downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second big winning opening 35 to be opened. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment), the high base state ( The high-accuracy low-base state has a higher possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 than the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), (2) The effect of the opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

  In addition, even in the case of the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the held ball is almost maintained (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the holding ball decrease speed is suppressed). A state where the player plays a game with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high base state). A state in which the player plays a ball in the second special winning opening 35 at the time of a hit and increases the number of balls in possession while expecting the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment to be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high accuracy low Base state), and diversify the game. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. It should be noted that a highly accurate low base state in which the number of balls can be increased is more advantageous for the player than a high base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high-accuracy high base state. If the jackpot has not been hit until the display is completed, the gaming state is changed to the high-accuracy low-basis state. In addition, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low-precision high base state or the high-precision high base state in the effect symbol display unit or the like. A game effect in a simple display mode. Thereby, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-basis state, after that, the state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of changes. It is possible to play games with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the big hit that shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state includes “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”. "2R fifth big hit" shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, and "2R sixth big hit" has 100 special symbol fluctuation displays. After passing, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Also, as the high-accuracy low base state, there are “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit”. The "2R 7th big hit" shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (normal state) after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, and the "2R 8th big hit" is 100 special specials. After the fluctuation display of the symbol has elapsed, the state shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the jackpot game and the high after the jackpot game according to the four jackpot types of “2R fifth jackpot”, “2R sixth jackpot”, “2R seventh jackpot”, and “2R eighth jackpot” By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. That is, a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified is set.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of occurrence of the “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” in the non-notifying state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after elapse of, the transition to the high-accuracy low base state after 100 times has a higher possibility than when the high base state ends in 50 times Shall do. Thereby, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after the lapse of 50 times, and continues the high-base state without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state after the lapse of 50 times ( Even if the non-notification state continues, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high-accuracy low-base state. This makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long time.

  It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, even if the transition is made after the lapse of 50 times or when the transition is made after the lapse of 100 times, the possibility of transition to the high-accuracy low-base state is set to the same value. Alternatively, conversely, when shifting 50 times, the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state may be higher than when shifting 100 times. As a result, when the high base state continues even after elapse of 50 times, the expectation for shifting to the high-accuracy low base state is reduced. Further, if another large hit type is provided, and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols have been changed and displayed, after the second predetermined number is greater than the first predetermined number ( The transition to the high-probability low-base state may be determined (if the jackpot is not hit by then). Conversely, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols have been changed and displayed, the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of times (if a big hit has been reached by that time). If not, it may be determined not to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, when a predetermined condition (such as a random number lottery) is established in the middle of the non-reporting state of the high base state, a character or a character whose game state is easily recognizable is displayed to the player (a fixed effect is executed), thereby playing the game. The state may be reported.

  In addition, in the high-accuracy low base state, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and when the result is out, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment in the high base state is as described above. This is the same as when a big hit occurs or when a big hit occurs.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by being also used as the gate 28. In this way, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being prevented from passing through the start gate 29 by the second starting port 21 or the like, and the big hit game is started. It is possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30 and the second The opening 21 and the second winning opening 35 need to be provided upstream.

  Further, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on in a predetermined manner, thereby notifying that the shot should be fired to the right game area. In addition, when the left hitting game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, thereby notifying that the shot should be fired to the left game area. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is configured by two LEDs “yz”, and indicates the launch direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the LED should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is fluctuated is displayed as “low-accuracy low-base state”, “high-accuracy low-base state”, “ It is possible to control to either the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state. Of these, the low-accuracy low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state", and the high-accuracy low-base state is Also referred to as "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described based on FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main processing, first, an initial setting is performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, setting of a stack, setting of a constant, setting of an interrupt time, setting of a CPU of the main control board 80, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time), and setting of various flags, status and counters are performed. Perform reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initialization (S101) is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary design is "Public", the special design is "Special design", the first special design is "Special design 1" or "First special design", and the second special design is "Special design". 2 "and" second special map ".

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), an update is performed by adding 1 to the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the interruption processing (S105) is enabled. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a period of, for example, 4 msec. After the interruption process (S105) is completed, before the next interruption process (S105) is started, the updating process of the various counter values by the regular symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is repeated. Be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), first, output processing (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), a command (control signal) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. I do. The command or the like output here includes information on the game state, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol as the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper one byte is information on the type of command, and the lower one byte is information on the content of the command.

  In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second special winning opening sensor 35a, the general entrance detecting sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is the same process as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. (The period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). Thereby, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203), a starting port sensor detection process (S204), a starting ball entry process (S205), a general symbol operation process (S206), and a special figure 1 operation process (S207) described later. ), The special figure 2 operation processing (S208), the reserved ball count processing (S209), and the power-off monitoring processing (S210). After that, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Until an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit) next, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output processing (S201) of the interrupt processing (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt processing (S105) is output.

[Start port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (the number of ordinary symbol reserved, specifically, Value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the stored ordinary symbol retaining ball number (S303), and the ordinary symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the ordinary symbol random number counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, general figure acquisition information) is stored in an address space according to the current number of ordinary symbol retaining balls in the general figure retaining storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80 It is determined whether or not the number of counters for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached four (the upper limit number) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the flow proceeds to S309. In S306, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a special figure 1 related random number is obtained. The process is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the number of counters for counting the number of second special map reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the processing is terminated. If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), “1” is added to the stored number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special figure 2 relationship is established. A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S308), the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (FIG. 7A). The random number value) and the obtained random number value are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Starting ball handling process]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball count has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure holding storage unit is read (S316). S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number counter (special symbol hit / fail judgment random number value) of the read acquired random numbers is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of place (prior determination). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (prior judgment). The determination (advance determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (a so-called “holding pre-reading”) in which a hit / fail determination for the special figure 2 hold (a determination of a big hit) is performed prior to a hit / fail determination in a later-described special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing. )).

  It should be noted that the pre-judgment as to whether or not a big hit is made in a big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in a high probability state, a big hit determination table for a high probability state, or in a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value based on the big hit determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-determination mode, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) can be used to determine variation pattern information. And a fluctuation pattern information determination table. In the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of a special symbol success / failure determination random number counter) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to a game state. It is possible to Then, based on the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed, and the like.

  Next, in S318, game information (advance determination information) related to the result of the determination in S317, specifically, information (big hit information) indicating whether the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the big hit determination value, Information (big hit type information) indicating the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (big hit type determining random value), and information (small hitting information) indicating whether the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the small hit determining value. ), Command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the like are generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). It should be noted that a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board as the special figure 2 start entering command, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but may transmit game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information or the like) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number.

  Also, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is determined whether the information is related to the big hit, the big hit type, and the small hit information. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in the high probability state, It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur if the judgment is made in the probability state. Accordingly, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entry command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the special symbol success / failure determination random number value among the acquired random number values read in S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the other big hit type determination random number counter (big hit value) is not transmitted. Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 2 start ball entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres has increased by "1", similarly to the processing relating to the special figure 2 described above (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to a case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as the processing of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure holding storage unit is read (S321). Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information according to the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the preliminary determination (read ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing described later.

[Public figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general-purpose operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the start ball entry process (S205). In the general-purpose operation process (S206), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal-purpose operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “general symbol operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), a normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “general symbol operation status” is “2” (S401). , NO in S403), the normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the "general symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is determined. The process (S406) is performed, and when the “normal drawing operation status” is “4” (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is "0" (S501). Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern in which the ordinary symbol variation time is 3 seconds is selected. After the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a later-described ordinary symbol random number shift process is performed (S504), and then an ordinary symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the ordinary symbol variation start process (S505), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started with the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the ordinary operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal symbol change.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S502). In the normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / non-judgment random number counter stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (low-precision high-base state or high-precision high-base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the state is the high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by the high-probability general-purpose approval / disapproval determination based on the value “0” to “238” (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the read value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether the symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the state is the low base state (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the ordinary symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by a low-probability general-purpose pass / fail judgment based on the table for hitting (the hit judgment value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general figure right / wrong determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and when it is determined that it is out (NO in S605), a stop display is performed. A normal symbol (a symbol deviating from the ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that the hit is a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (symbol hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Regular pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shifting process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by one (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the general-purpose reservations in the general-purpose reservation storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the general-purpose reserve storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general-purpose reserve storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general drawing reservation is digested in the reservation order.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
Next, the normal symbol change processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol change processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the change time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the elapsed time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal symbol variation stop command is set (S802), the ordinary symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or a lost normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining a normal symbol hit / fail determination is performed (S804), and the process ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the state is the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for a high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), and proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter for counting the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening of the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is performed as an opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (the second starting port 21). The pattern is set (S906), and the routine goes to S904. The release patterns for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) are release patterns in which release for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter. In S904, the ordinary operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the per-figure end flag is ON (S1001). The ordinary figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If it is determined that the ordinary flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not being opened (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second startup port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second startup port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened, It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005). If it is determined that it is not time to close the second startup port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second startup port (YES in S1005), a process of closing the second startup port 21 (closed) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second startup port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is directly terminated to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), a general-purpose hit end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and a general-purpose hit end flag is set ( S1010), end the processing. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the state B (high base state), and the state A Also, in the state C (low base state), when the opening of the second starting port 21 is performed three times, the state becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per ordinary drawing is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 set in S903 or S906 has been completed. Then, the general figure end flag is turned off (S1011), the general figure flag is turned off (S1012), the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interruption process, the ordinary symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the ordinary symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the general map operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), a special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO in S1101, YES in S1103) performs special symbol 1 change processing (S1104), and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), The special symbol 1 decision processing (S1106) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric as a big hit game If the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process ends. Incidentally, the special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. Also, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit determination, the special electric auditors character processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hitting game is executed.

[Special pattern 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved special ball 1) is “0” (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “0”, that is, that there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), Then, it is determined whether or not the special map 2 is playing (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special map 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special map 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), it is in the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during execution of the customer waiting demonstration screen). It is determined whether or not it is (S1208), and if it is determined that it is on the standby screen (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), a standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

  Also, in S1201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending ball count is not “0”, that is, there is one or more storage of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (S1201) NO), a special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), a special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and a special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "the special figure 2 (the second special symbol) is not playing" means that the special figure 2 is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls is "0". Means that. Of course, this means that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special map 2 is executed.

[Special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing]
Next, the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 win / fail determination processing (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure hold first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol hit determination (the oldest memory) which has been stored (the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is performing the variable display relating to the big hit, the other special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the hit / fail determination, and the small hit or the small hit is determined. Any one of them is missed (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). Since the first special symbol hit determination result does not have a small hit, if the second special symbol is performing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit determination executed during that time is: All come off. In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit change flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the change display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, It is determined whether the state is the high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when the probability change flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the state is the low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A). The determination is made based on the table (the jackpot determination values are “3” and “397”) (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probable change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a hit determination is made based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503".

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606). AS) is read out, the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1609). The big hit variation flag in FIG. 1 is turned on (S1610), and the process is terminated. In addition, in the case of the hit determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination of the second special symbol, the hit determination is performed for the second special symbol. The big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table. If it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, one of 4R first big hit and 4R second big hit is executed. If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, a 15R third big hit, a 4R fourth big hit, a 2R fifth big hit, a 2R sixth big hit, a 2R seventh big hit, a 2R seventh big hit, 2R Either of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, a lost symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit change flag, a first big hit change flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing a change display related to the big hit (a change display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second big hit change flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a change display related to the big hit (a change display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the big hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit change flag, a second small hit change flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a change display related to the small hit (a change display in which the small hit symbol is stopped) is executed. The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. When the big hit change flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the change related to the big hit is being displayed), in the other special symbol determination, the process of determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the big hit in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an extremely large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special symbol 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the game state is the state A (whether the game state is the low-probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to with reference to the state A big hit table (the part corresponding to the state A and the big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different fluctuation time lengths is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first deviation number departure table (the state A and deviation and departure number of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the portions corresponding to 1 and 2. Also, in S1705, when it is determined that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second out-of-number-of-hold table (FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

  Thereby, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. The possibility that the fluctuation pattern is selected is high. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of retained balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

  When it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not the state A (low-probability low-base state) (NO in S1701), then, whether the gaming state is the state B (low-probability high-base state, high-probability high-base state) Is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that the state is state B (S1708), then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), with reference to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation is performed based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). A pattern is selected (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  Also, in S1708, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the state B (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state), that is, the gaming state is the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) (NO in S1708). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (FIG. 9) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in the state C and the portion corresponding to the big hit (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C departure table (the part corresponding to state C and departure in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  Note that, in the state B and the state C, since the game is a game in which the right-handed game is performed mainly with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first game is performed. Variation display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the state B and the state C is simple (the number of types is small and the fluctuation time is also short). In the state B, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is P15, and in the case of a miss, the variation pattern is P16. Further, in the state C, the case of the big hit is set to the change pattern P23, and the case of the big hit is set to the change pattern P24.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In the other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is set to one lower position (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of an address space corresponding to the addresses “0000” to “0003”). , Address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure holding storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), the special figure 1 change start processing (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 change start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 change processing (S1104), first, the change time of the special figure 1 (the change time determined according to the change pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special map 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the flow shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the flow shifts to the process of S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of times the special symbol has been changed during state B (high base state) Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the state is the low-accuracy high-base state, the state transitions to the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and if the state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the state transitions to the high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state).

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the change display of the special symbol is stopped by the result according to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 change interruption process (S1902) is executed when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the change display of the special figure 1, This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the suspended measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. Thus, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game relating to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination processing and the variable display relating to the other special symbol are not executed.

  The special figure 1 change interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 change interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), It is determined whether or not the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game according to FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the processing is ended. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The suspension flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is suspended (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thus, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

  Also, in S2901, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 has been completed, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is set to OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. As a result, the suspended display of the first special symbol (measurement of the variation time) can be resumed.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as a “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol A special figure 2 interrupt flag (also referred to as a “second interrupt flag”) indicating that the variable display is interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interrupt flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit change flag indicating that the big change display of the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating the execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the processing shifts to S2004. In this way, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the change display relating to the big hit is ended (the big hit is fixed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the special winning opening) is set to “4”. (S2004) In order to start the big hit game, a big hit opening command is set (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the process is terminated. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be variably displayed. By receiving the stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the special symbol change display has ended. In addition, this will be in a jackpot waiting state. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, the special figure 1 big hit flag (“the first big hit”, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called a "second big hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment regarding the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to a big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). Also, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag"), which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to a small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit at the timing when the big hit symbol is determined and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first big hit occurs, a display mode such as “2R △ 4R ▲ 15R △” (for example, ：: turned on, Δ: turned off) is used. Next, the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), the special figure 1 operation processing (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206) and the like, the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) performs processing in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation processing (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) following the special figure 1 operation processing (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed and displayed in parallel by the special figure 1 operation processing and the special figure 2 operation processing. That is, the first special figure reservation is consumed and the second special figure reservation is consumed (“variation display of the first special symbol and variation display of the second special symbol”, “first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol”). And ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the second starting opening (the second special symbol determination) is based on the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the first opening (the first special symbol determining). It is more likely to be a big hit (greater amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation processing (S207), the processing relating to the special symbol display unit 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is performed in five stages. Each of these stages is assigned a “special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5”. When the “special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), a special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the “special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), performs special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), The special symbol 2 finalizing process (S1156) is performed, and when the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, and S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric as a big hit game If the “Special figure 2 operation status” is “5” (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), special electric auditors processing as a small hit game is performed. Step 2 (S1109) is performed. The special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special figure 2 operation processing has a special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation processing.

  Here, the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) Only the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) is performed. This means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. This is because the game cannot be executed in parallel with the jackpot game related to the special symbol (only one of them can be executed). In the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit determination does not have a small hit. However, as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol hit determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 hit / fail judgment processing]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this processing is processing relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first second special figure holding) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. Also, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. It is determined whether the result of (1) is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit change flag is turned on (S1307), and the process is terminated. Other processing is the same as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), the processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process relating to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. To select the fluctuation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit change flag is ON, a change pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

  Further, in the state B and the state C, the game is performed mainly by the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first special symbol hit / fail judgment). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (the number of types is small and the time is short).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processes (S1404) are performed, and this process is completed. In other processes (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage locations of the various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b are shifted down by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure hold fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), the special figure 2 change start processing (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 change start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", and the special figure 2 change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the second special symbol is started. I do.

[Processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination processing (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs processing (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit variation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108), a big hit game start process described later is first executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when a player fires a game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in a big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is determined and stopped with the big hit symbol and turned into a big hit, by passing the game ball to the start gate, the big hit start flag is turned on, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state capable of executing the big hit. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, a telephone, or the like. Then, after the break, the game ball is fired at an arbitrary timing of the player and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can be advanced. The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (the first big winning device 31) in the big hit game has all been completed (the big hit game has been finished).

  If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is being opened (S2104), and it is determined that the opening is not being performed. In this case (NO in S2104), it is time to open the special winning opening (first winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round. Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of the big hit.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of entering the special winning opening in the round is the prescribed maximum entering number (this implementation). In the first example, it is determined whether or not the number has reached (10 pieces per round) (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of winning balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is determined whether it is time to close the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30), that is, the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the server (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the prescribed number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or when the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by one (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned on (S2118), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the last round has been completed, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), a game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing ends.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start processing (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, it has not passed through the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. In this case (NO in S2151), it is then determined whether or not the probable variable flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probable variable flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probable variable flag is turned OFF (S2102), and Move on to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the state to the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probable change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probable change flag. If it is determined in step S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in step S2154), the process proceeds to step S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), the big hit game is started (to start the round game). The big hit start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. Thereby, the gaming machine is continued in the jackpot waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. Thereby, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are set as the probable variable big hits. Is determined to correspond to any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the game has ended this time is the probable big hit (YES in S2201), the probable change flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (S2203). . If it is determined in S2203 that the big hit game that has been completed is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), and the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205). Finish. As a result, the high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the high-precision high base state is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the big hit game that has ended is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), and the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211). Finish. Thereby, the high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the high-precision high base state is set. In S2209, when it is determined that the big hit game that has been completed is not the 2R sixth big hit, that is, any of the 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. Then, the process ends. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the high-accuracy low base state.

  In S2201, when it is determined that the end is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then, is the jackpot game ended 2R seventh jackpot? Is determined (S2206). In S2206, when it is determined that the big hit game ended is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thereby, the high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the low-precision high base state is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the big hit game that has ended is not the 2R seventh big hit, that is, the 4R second big hit or the 2R eighth big hit (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), "50" is set to the B counter (S2205), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the low-precision high base state is set.

[Special figure operation status setting processing 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the flag is related to No. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001) ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has all been completed in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not being opened (NO in S2302), it is determined whether it is time to open the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35), that is, the opening time for the small hit has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the interval time between a plurality of times of opening has elapsed (S2303). . Regarding the small hitting game, the small hitting game (opening operation) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the small hit symbol is determined and stopped, regardless of the passing of the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second special winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the number of all the game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). When it is determined in S2306 that the number of entered balls has not reached the predetermined number (10) (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, a predetermined time after opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second large winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the flow proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is reset. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the process ends as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the flow shifts to small hit end processing in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit ending process for ending the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), and a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  When it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since six opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered), It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small hit game in the high-accuracy low-base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, thereby enhancing the entertainment of the game. Note that, at the start of the small hitting game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON. When the small hitting game is finished, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hitting game.

[Special figure operation status setting processing 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is terminated. Finish. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball count process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball count processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count, the special figure 2 reserved ball count, and the normal symbol reserved ball count stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read (FIG. 45). S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (a reserved ball number command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is terminated.

[Power-off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball count process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is an input of a power-off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether the game is stable, whether the game is hit, or the number of pending balls, The data relating to the number of remaining fluctuations is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter the loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the above-described characteristic configuration, thereby achieving a unique effect that is not provided by the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or by comparing with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. Has a remarkable effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a big hit occurs in the special symbol determination (the first special symbol (also referred to as “first identification information”) or the second special symbol (also referred to as “second identification information”). Is based on a big hit symbol (which is also stopped and displayed in a “specific display mode”), a high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the high-probability state ( Benefits) are terminated.

  The process of providing the high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as “privilege providing means”. The first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronous), and the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same result is determined. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the hit symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, an operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time) and the like, resetting of various flags, statuses, and counters are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are normally maintained (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned on, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, the data relating to the effect control at the time of power failure such as a power failure is backed up. For this reason, at the time of power-on (when power is restored) after power is restored after a power failure such as a power failure, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), the production control microcomputer 91 performs production control. Returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, the interrupt is prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for effect determination includes a random number for variable effect determination that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, a random number for announcement effect determination that determines the announcement effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol. There are random numbers. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the method of updating the random numbers performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added by two instead of by one. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As the timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball input command) notifying that there is a starting ball is transmitted from the main control board 80, or when a control signal (notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80) (A change start command) is transmitted, or a change effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board. The command is transmitted to the control board that is the corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command performs various effects using various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to hit games, etc.) are executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control such as effect symbols executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 is performed. It is also possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of a movable decorative member, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. A determination is made (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process is terminated. . This reception interruption processing (S4008) is processing executed prior to other interruption processing (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The ramp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch status acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch status acquisition process is executed. A switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a start ball input command has not been received (NO in S4401). Then, the process shifts to the process of S4403, and when it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the effect holding information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process shifts to the process of S4403. The effect pending information storage processing (S4402) is a process for storing various information (preliminary judgment result, random hit determination) included in the start ball entry command (special figure 1 start ball input command or special figure 2 start ball input command) received in S4401. The game information such as a numerical value, a fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) is determined according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) and the number of special figure reserved balls at the time of transmitting / receiving the start entering command (command generation). Are stored in a predetermined effect suspension information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received start ball entry command is a special figure 1 start ball entry command corresponding to the reserved ball number “4” of the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result or hit type included in the special figure 1 start ball entry command Is stored as special figure 1 effect suspension information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 effect suspension information storage area. The effect holding information thus stored is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the storage content (acquisition information) of the hold storage unit). For this reason, the effect suspension information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be referred to as “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation effect start process (to be described later) ( (S4404), the process proceeds to S4405, and if it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to perform the fluctuation effect. A variable effect ending process for ending is performed (S4406). In the variable effect ending process (S4406), the variable effect ending command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variable effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been changed and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Stop display is performed, and the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect ending process. In addition, the fluctuation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing a hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (the occurrence of a big hit) ), A round start command transmitted at the start of the round, a round end command transmitted at the end of the round, an ending command transmitted at the end of the big hit game, a first winning port in the round game The first large winning opening ball entry command transmitted based on the ball entering the 30 and the second large winning opening ball entering command transmitted based on the ball entering the second large winning opening in the small hitting game, etc. are applicable. . In S4407, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to execution of an effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. A round effect command specifying a round effect according to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the ending command, an ending effect specifying an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a special winning opening ball entry command (a first special winning opening ball entering command or a second special winning opening ball entering command), a special winning opening (first large winning opening) specified based on the command is received. A ball entry effect command designating a ball entry effect corresponding to the entry into the mouth 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the opening effect and the round in accordance with the progress of the hit game. An effect, a ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol change start command or a normal symbol change stop command) except for the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start processing (S4402) executed in the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variable effect start processing (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers such as a variable effect determination random number, a preview effect determination random number, and a design symbol determination random number is performed. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the change start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Based on the obtained value (acquisition information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating a variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for specifying the current game state, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. A result, symbol information for designating a jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since the variation pattern specification command includes a command corresponding to the first special symbol and a command corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect design game effect to be started this time. It is possible to determine whether the (display of the variation of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the fluctuation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the fluctuation effect start process executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is one of values from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status “1” corresponds to the effect mode A, the mode status “2” corresponds to the effect mode B, the mode status “3” corresponds to the effect mode C, and the mode status “4”. The mode status corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. The current production mode can be specified by referring to the current mode status.

  Here, the effect mode is a mode of the effect mainly based on the image display device 7. If the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as a notice effect or a reach effect is different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 varies depending on the effect mode, such as a different aspect of the effect symbol 8 (for example, a design design, a number design, etc.), a different character, an item, and a different background image. It is different. In addition, it is also possible to perform the stage design game production in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.) are provided, different game productions can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low-base state is controlled, the effect modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low-base state is controlled, and the effect mode E Is executed when the vehicle is controlled to the low-probability-high base state and when the vehicle is controlled to the high-probability-high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any one of A to D, the player checks the effect mode to determine whether the current playing state is the low-probability low-base state or the high-probability low-base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player checks the production mode, it is difficult to know whether the current playing state is the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state. is there. In that sense, effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, this is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like, and is a pattern of a variable effect (variable effect pattern, effect design) controlled mainly by the sub-control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining a game effect are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, a variable production pattern determination table and a preview production determination table to be used are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of announcement effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. I do. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is “P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), a fluctuation effect pattern determination table is used as a fluctuation effect pattern determination table when a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. A fluctuation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the change mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and includes a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode statuses) corresponding to the effect modes (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the fluctuation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a fluctuation effect pattern suitable for the specified fluctuation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the fluctuating effect pattern, a fluctuating mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thereby, in the effect design game effect, when a reach effect is performed (reach effect effect game effect) or when a character effect is performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the effect is not executed (reach-less effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. Note that the reach effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination indicates a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same (Zoro eyes). In the case where a certain mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) in a symbol (same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode. ), And whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol (three identical effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one continues to fluctuate (scroll display). Refers to a production that indicates At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation of the big hit and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

  In S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), an effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as a “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is a result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment, which is out of reach. One of the effect symbols is different from the other effect symbols, and at least one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is in the absence of the reach when the effect symbol is out of reach. It is said that the directing pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed in accordance with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. In this announcement effect, the effect (beforehand, before the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) (during display of the variation of the effect symbol)) indicating the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner. Information production). In S4506, based on the random number for announcement effect determination acquired in S4501 and the announcement effect determination table set in S4504, a designated variation pattern and an announcement effect suitable for the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the variable effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect is set in an output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable effect start process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern set in the step (1) is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the fluctuation effect and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, a fluctuation display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of staging design game effects]
Next, the outline of the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like based on the variable effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 Is displayed on the display screen 7a. An effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8.

  The fluctuation display of the effect design 8 is, in principle, scrolled vertically (in ascending order) in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” ... → “7” → “8” → “9” (in ascending order) ( Vertical scrolling) is performed, and when it reaches “9”, it returns to “1” again and repeats vertical scrolling. The manner in which the effect symbols 8 are displayed in a variable manner is determined by the variable effect patterns stored in the above-described variable effect pattern determination table. For this reason, as for the mode of the variable display, in addition to the vertical scroll, for example, there are various scroll displays such as a horizontal scroll display (horizontal scroll) and a switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are displayed in a descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of the variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

  Further, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display is stopped as the fluctuation time elapses. There are a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the effect symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is changed to “left symbol”. (2) the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“the middle symbol → right symbol”). (3) a stop mode (also referred to as a "third stop mode") in which all the stop timings (stop timings) of the respective symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol stops thereafter. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and in which stop mode the variable display is stopped is determined by the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. Has become something. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection and determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection and determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be processed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "first stop symbol", the second stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol is a third stop symbol. This is also called “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Of the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in the effect mode C (state C) and the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small”. This is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stopping the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on “hit”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit”. In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”) based on In the case of D (state C), when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach fluctuation or the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being “out” or “big hit”, In the stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped That.

  The third stop mode (all symbols simultaneous stop) is mainly (1) in the effect mode A, B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening change according to the number of special figure reserved balls works (at the start of change) Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol right / wrong judgment is "out", and based on this, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal fluctuation (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being “out” or “small hit”. In the case, (3) in the effect modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol correctness determination being “out”, And (4) in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), mainly in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit”. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the reach fluctuation based on the reach fluctuation.

  As described above, a plurality of stop modes when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped are provided in accordance with the mode of the variable display based on the effect of the effect mode (game state) and the result of the special symbol determination, and the result (stop display mode). Thus, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the situation of the game and to make it various. Also, for the player, it is possible to estimate the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) after paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops. It becomes possible, and through the stop mode, it becomes possible to estimate the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not the special game is executed, the possibility, and the like. This allows the player to pay attention to the stop mode at the time when the variable display stops, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol” (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the left symbol and the middle symbol stop almost at the same time and then the right symbol stops thereafter can be provided. The conditions under which the mode is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, but can be variously determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so as to be classified by color, and the type of the symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to a gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), among the odd symbols, “7” is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and the other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5” and “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue symbols”). Pattern). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd symbols, “3”, “5”, and “7” are red symbols, and the other odd symbols are “1” and “9”. Is a green symbol, and even symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

  It should be noted that the correspondence between the symbols and the colors according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondences can be adopted, and the types of colors are not limited to the present embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it is also possible to determine the symbol type by elements other than the color. For example, the type of character in the case where a character is attached to the effect design, and the number design in the case of having an effect design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect design (number design) representing a number. The design type may be determined by the character design, or the design type may be simply determined by the odd design and the even design.

  The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-described stop mode, The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), “completely disjointed eyes” (“124” and the like) in which all three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numerals), and rendering symbols 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number) and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (numerical symbol) from the others. ) Is a non-specified mode (non-specified mode) that does not trigger the execution of the hit game. On the other hand, a “Zoro-eye” (“777” or the like) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is defined as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6). I have.

  On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, the “reach variation” among the variations is also used as a 2R jackpot mode which is a trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player (the number of acquired prize balls) in the 2R jackpot game is smaller than that in the 4R or larger jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high) A special game serving as a trigger for setting a state B (high base state) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession of balls) in a small hit game as compared to the low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game in which the degree of advantage (amount of profit) is relatively low. In addition, the “perfect variation” among the variations is also used as a small hit mode which is a trigger for executing the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the period, and therefore, the small winning big prize winning port (the second starting port) located downstream of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit profit can be obtained (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the variations, a “specific variation” to be described later is a small hit mode which is a trigger for executing a small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-accuracy low-base state). Here, the small hitting mode (specific breakup) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hitting mode (zorrow) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eyes, the reach-disordered eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the complete disassembly among the departures (completely disparate or reach-disordered) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  Since the state A (low-probability low-base state) is a game state based on performing a left-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. In this case, it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (the change display of the second special symbol) is performed during the change display of the first special symbol. If performed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variable display (and stop display) by the performance display 102 is performed. I have. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high accuracy low base state) are game states based on right-handed game, it is mainly determined whether or not the second special symbol is correct (second special pattern). This is because it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol change display) is performed during the second special symbol change display. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed below, the corresponding variation display of the effect symbol 8 is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but the variation display ( And stop display) only. However, if a special symbol hit / fail judgment that is contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made and a “big hit” judgment result is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit / no-go judgment is made in state C) When a big hit is performed), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating the occurrence of the big hit. Do. Thereby, while the effect display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variable display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect symbol is displayed in parallel with the variable display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol to be played is a big hit. Further, by suggesting the occurrence of the big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity of obtaining the profit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low-probability low base state). The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and shifting of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed according to a predetermined mode control condition under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). . For this reason, the setting of the effect mode in the state A cannot involve the player.

  In the state A, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”, which are blue symbols, and “1”, “3”, “5”, which are green symbols. A symbol “9” and a symbol “7” including a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)) based on the effect mode and the symbol type, the variable display is basically in the second stop mode. (Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIG. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)). When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), the operation is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, the reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and thereafter, the middle symbol (staging symbol 8C) changes and displays. Until the stop, a reach effect is executed on an image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect mainly showing whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped earlier (whether the big hit mode is displayed or not) is developed. This reach establishment and reach effect are the same in the states B and C.

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a variable manner, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a staggered pattern (a complete staggered pattern or a reach staggered pattern) as a result of the fluctuation display, the result is “out of range”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are displayed. Is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 4R jackpot according to the first special symbol. And when the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends is state C (high-precision low base state), and is related to the "4R second big hit". In the case of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state B (low-precision high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[State B game play]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (the low-probability base state or the high-probability base state). Note that the high-accuracy high-base state is set after the end of the big-hit game based on the occurrence of “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit” in state C (high-accuracy low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed in accordance with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

  In the state B, the effect symbols 8 are "2", "4", "6", "8", which are blue symbols, "1", "9", which are green symbols, and red. The symbols "3", "5", and "7" are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Be executed. In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the effect mode and the symbol type (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode. (Simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). In the state B, the second special symbol time-saving function and the high-base generating function operate, so that the variation without the reach and the variation of the small hit can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. That's why. When the variable display stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so that the player's expectation can be reduced. There is no fan of them. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation (ie, “reach fluctuation”) with a reach, or “reach-influenced off-period fluctuation” (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach) that is actually a fluctuation that pretends to be a reach fluctuation. In this case, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f)).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (a staggered pattern) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. In the state B, the big hit game when the design symbol 8 is displayed in the big jackpot mode is “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. A jackpot game effect for three big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R fourth big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a 2R jackpot mode (reach variation) as a result of the fluctuation display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. Be replaced. Then, when the started big hit game is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (state B), If the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit in the state B, and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on this, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. You. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment) (see FIG. 55B). When the small hit is made in the state B, the small hit game is executed. However, even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol). No. 8 is displayed with complete disjointed eyes), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equal to the deviation. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting game remains in the state B as long as the timing does not overlap with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

  In addition, in the low-probability high base state which is the state B, when the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. At the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (out-of-range fluctuation), the gaming state shifts to state A (low-probability low-base state), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". I do. In addition, when the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without generating a big hit in the high-accuracy high base state which is the state B, The game state shifts to state C (high-accuracy low-base state) at the end (stop) of the predetermined number of change display (out-of-change), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". .

[Game production in state C]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to state C (high-accuracy low-base state). The game effect performed in the state C mainly includes an effect design game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, and a small hit occurrence. (Small hit game production). The state C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which small hits frequently occur until the next big hit occurs, so that many prize balls can be obtained by the small hits between the big hits. For this reason, in state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details on this point will be described later.

  Further, as described above, in the state C, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect in the state C is performed in a state where the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) in the same manner as in the state A and the state B described above. The player can operate the first effect button 63a to select an effect mode, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. In the state C, as in the state B, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”, which are blue symbols, and “1”, “9”, which are green symbols. ”And the symbols“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”, and“ 7 ”, which are red symbols, are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same between the state B and the state C.

  Here, between the “effect mode C” and the “effect mode D” in the state C, the contents of the game effects (effect specifications) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are significantly different. . Therefore, in the following, the game effects in each effect mode will be described separately for the effect mode C and the effect mode D.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, an effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8, as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and are displayed so that both characters face each other. These characters are displayed even when the symbol display is not changed. Each of the ally character and the enemy character has a plurality of types of characters. One of the ally character (also referred to as an “ally character”) and one of the enemy characters (also referred to as an “enemy character”) are in the effect mode C. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that a friendly character attacks an enemy character, or a friendly character is attacked by an enemy character. The effect by such a character (character effect) is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when performed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information), and when the result of the variable display is a small hit, the small hit game is performed. There is a case where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed along with a special game after the end of the fluctuation display).

  A right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handed operation is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The displayed winning ball count image C1 is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying five-digit numbers of “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. The prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls (acquired prize balls) obtained by the player through a big hit game, a small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is state B or state When it becomes C, it indicates the number of acquired prize balls during the period (so-called acquired prize balls during the extended holiday period) until the game state returns to state A (except during the jackpot game). . In state C (high-accuracy low-base state), a small hit occurs frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game increases). The prize ball count image C1 is displayed in order to produce the effect. That is, as the small hitting game effect, an effect display (entering ball effect) using the prize ball count image C1 is performed. The details of the effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit will be described later.

  The basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 57, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect holding (holding design), right-handed instruction image M, background, and the like are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, so that the variation without the reach can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (pumping effect) for increasing the expectation of the player is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out-of-range or big hit) or out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being “small hit”, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → The right symbol is stopped (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (a staggered pattern) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. The big hit game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state C in the state C is related to “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. In this case, for the 15R third big hit Big hit game effect or big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a 2R jackpot mode (reach variation) as a result of the fluctuation display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. Be replaced. As the big hit game effect in this case, the end of the state C, that is, the effect display indicating the end of the advantageous state where small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the started big hit game is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (state B), If the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, in the effect mode C (state C), when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 based thereon is performed, the fluctuation display is performed by the normal fluctuation and the first fluctuation is performed. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed with a specific variation (small hitting mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols are the same among the three symbols, and the other symbol is different (“335”, “355”). , "557", etc.) are set as the specific irregularities (small hitting mode). Although a symbol combination that constitutes a specific jumbled eye (small hitting mode) does not reach the reach, it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number). Is also referred to as a “reach sequence”.

  Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") constituting the specific disjointed eyes (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute the specific disjointed eyes in state A. Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be performed, in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific jiggle (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols “3” and “5” are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the design type (color type in this example) of the effect symbol, and to attract interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, in the state A, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”), which are green symbols, and in the state C, a specific variation (first The display pattern is a red pattern that can be configured. For example, a part of the effect pattern (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) which is a blue pattern in the state A is a red pattern. And the effect symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") which are blue symbols in the state A and the effect symbols ("1", "3", "5") which are green symbols , "9") (for example, "4" and "5") can also be made red. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C which does not exist in the state A may be provided, and a specific jiggle (first display mode) may be constituted by the symbols belonging to the exclusive symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the pattern types that can constitute a particular disjointed eye stand out more, and to easily attract the player's attention. Alternatively, in the present embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5” that are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A are red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, In the state A, the symbol “7” which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning may be configured as a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are red symbols (second symbol type), are symbols that can form a specific Barracuda, and the symbol “7” that is a gold symbol (third symbol type) May be a 15R jackpot mode (the “7” zoro pattern) corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that can constitute a specific varnish eye (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific zoro eye (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished from each other. It is possible to easily show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the fluctuation display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol → In the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol), the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped. For this reason, not only the small hitting mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also the stop mode of the variable display which triggers the display of the small hitting mode attracts the player's attention. Further, in the effect mode C, at the time of derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the fluctuation display), an effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, one line image extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the periphery of each symbol And an effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating the image. Thereby, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the production effect of Note that the mode of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other modes can be adopted.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hitting game executed in response to the display of the small hitting mode, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is entered for each ball. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, the prize balls based on the ball entry into the second special winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for one ball entry. Therefore, the acquired prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of ten. Further, when the small hit game is executed in response to the display of the small hit mode, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a with the execution of the small hit game. The effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as a "first effect") in which one of the ally characters and the enemy character (for example, the ally character) attacks or tackles the other (for example, the enemy character) And The character effect in this case (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a later-described battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the small winning port (second big winning port 35) for the small hit, and the opening time of the second big winning port 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character production in accordance with the small hit game with a short execution time in this manner, it becomes easy to make the character production and a character production performed as a fluctuation production described later as a relevant production, and from the fluctuation display. In the small hit game, it is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) with a sense of unity by the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the winning ball count image C1 due to the small hit is based on the second big winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big winning opening sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the control unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these effects are performed, each of these effects corresponds to a small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop of the effect symbol 8 in the first stop mode and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) frequently occur, and accordingly, the small hit game is performed. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed at a high frequency, the coordination between the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect strongly influences the occurrence of the small hit to the player. It is possible to impress. As a result, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for winning a prize ball (increase in possession of balls) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the entertainment interest in the effect mode C (state C). In addition, the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 35 in the small hitting game, the character effect is not performed, so that the entering ball when the game ball enters the second special winning opening 35 It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach fluctuation (out of swing or big hit) or the reach-influenced out-of-reach fluctuation is performed in the effect mode C. As described above, in the effect mode C, in the state where the ally character (the first character) and the enemy character (the second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, the effect symbol game effect (the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8, etc.). ) Is performed (see FIG. 56A). In addition, in the case where the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and the case where the reach fluctuates, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → medium symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). In such a situation, when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the fluctuation effect pattern of the reach fluctuation or the reach swaying fluctuation, the left symbol (the effect symbol 8L) is first stopped according to the second stop mode. However, when the left symbol (the first stop symbol) stops, an effect display depicting a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the opponent is performed. (1st production) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first production is roughly classified into a pattern in which an ally character attacks the enemy character (also referred to as a “first production pattern A”) and a pattern in which the enemy character attacks the ally character (“ There are two patterns, which are also referred to as "first effect pattern B"). Further, for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the content (type) of the attack to be performed and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information on the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) is suggested by the contents of the effect when the first effect is performed (big hit reliability, contents of the effect that can be executed later, etc.). (Notice). Note that the first effect is an effect that ends when one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other, and does not include a battle effect described later.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as a “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which a friend character attacks), at least the 2R jackpot mode is not displayed as a result of the change display. That is, it is indicated that the big hit which is the end trigger of the state C which is the advantageous state in which the small hit frequently occurs does not occur. In this case, in the fluctuation, the right symbol (the second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (the third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment). Or (reach fluctuating fluctuation), reach is established and developed into reach production, but finally the middle design stops at a design different from the left and right design, and the production design 8 is displayed with a reach pattern (outer form) The effect design 8 is displayed in the form of a zigzag (big hit mode) after the (reach out-of-reach change) or reach effect (big hit change). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (a pattern in which an enemy character attacks), the 2R big hit mode which is the end trigger of the state C is displayed as a result of the change display. Suggests a possibility. In this case, in the fluctuation, the right symbol (the second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (the third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment). Or (reach fluttering deviation fluctuation), although reach was established and developed into reach production, finally the middle design stopped at a design different from the left and right design, and the production design 8 was in the reach pattern (outside or 2R big hit) It is displayed (reach deviation fluctuation or 2R big hit fluctuation), or the effect design 8 is displayed in a zigzag manner (big hit mode) through reach effect (big hit fluctuation). In this manner, the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol) allows the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach is established, whether or not the development is advantageous for the player, and the like). It is possible to suggest. Then, the first effect pattern A suggests that the subsequent development is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided what to do.

  After the left symbol (the production symbol 8L, the first stop symbol) is stopped in this way (after the execution of the first production), the right symbol (the production symbol 8R, the second stop symbol) stops according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol to be stopped becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established. Then, the middle symbol (staging symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the staging symbol 8 is displayed. It is displayed in a complete disjointed pattern (out of form). In this case, the fluctuation is a fluctuation that fluctuates the reach (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as a “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is an effect by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect) and the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is still changing. In this embodiment, this is performed as a battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character that has been displayed as a background. The second production (battle production) can be roughly classified into a pattern in which an ally character wins a battle (a battle) (also referred to as a “second production pattern A”) and a pattern in which an ally character loses a battle (a battle). (Also referred to as a “second production pattern B”) and a pattern (also referred to as a “second production pattern C”) that ends the battle without victory or defeat (also referred to as a “second production pattern C”). There are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of character, which one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks first (the type of the character that strikes first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (such as a jackpot reliability) on the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) based on the content of the performance when the second performance (battle performance) is performed. I have.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, among the patterns of the second effect (also referred to as “second effect pattern”), the second effect pattern A (the ally victory pattern) is such that the ally character makes a first strike. There is a pattern where the player wins as it is, or a pattern where the enemy character strikes first and the ally character finally wins. In the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which an enemy character makes a first strike and a friend character is defeated. Further, the second production pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) includes a pattern in which an ally character performs a preemptive attack but an enemy character evades the attack, and a pattern in which an enemy character performs a preemptive attack and an ally character withstands the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with the first strike of an ally character or an enemy character, and the production contents (battle production) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes) are predetermined in accordance with each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern. According to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505, the second effect (battle) is selected from any of a plurality of patterns. Or directing).

  In the present embodiment, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a jackpot variation based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). When the effect design 8 is displayed in a double-eye pattern (big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (friend win pattern) Direction) is performed. In this case, the big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed after the change display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), and after the big hit game, the gaming state becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) again. Therefore, after the big hit game, the player can again play the game in the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur. As described above, since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the friend character wins.

  Also, when the reach fluctuation in the effect mode C is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the result of the second special symbol right / wrong judgment being a deviation, that is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a fluctuation display as a result of the fluctuation display. When displayed in the eyes (missing state), a second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is performed before displaying the outlier mode (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the display of the off state). Since the game in the state C continues as described above, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the battle (battle) ends without a win or loss.

  Further, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots), that is, the variation When the effect design 8 is displayed as a reach variation (2R big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derivation display), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the 2R big hit mode), the big hit game of 2R is performed, and the game state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. For this reason, the player ends the game in the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur, triggered by the occurrence of the 2R big hit. As described above, since the gaming state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated.

  Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the contents in which the ally character makes the first strike are the second effect pattern A (the ally winning pattern) and the second effect pattern C (the winning / losing undetermined pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is the first character of the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred at that time that there is at least no possibility of a 2R jackpot, that is, a possibility of ending state C. On the other hand, since the patterns including the content of the enemy character performing the first strike correspond to all of the second effect patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. If the battle production (second production) is started after the formation, and the confrontation (battle) in that battle production starts with the enemy character's first strike, the possibility of a 2R jackpot at that point (possible termination of state C) Gender) cannot be ruled out. Then, when the ally character is defeated and the battle effect ends after the enemy character's first strike, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, and the fluctuation is 2R hit. That is, the game in the state C is ended. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins after the enemy character's first strike and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A, The fluctuation is a 15R or 4R big hit fluctuation, and when the ally character evades the preemptive attack of the enemy character and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern C Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in each of these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. As described above, in the reach fluctuation in the effect mode C, by performing the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur continues (win, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs up the player's expectations and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the fluctuating production (character production) from the first production to the second production (battle production), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the production mode C (state C). Becomes

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56B, in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 has a smaller size (reduced size) in the upper right of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 as compared to other effect modes such as the effect mode C. A main image X imitating a fighter is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D adopting such a screen configuration, the effect display mainly showing a state in which the fighter plane flies is developed on the display screen 7a while normally displaying the change of the effect symbol 8 at the upper right of the screen. Has become something. Then, when the reach is changed, the effect design 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and after reaching, a predetermined reach effect (e.g., an advanced effect) is displayed on substantially the entire display screen. It is executable by using. In the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this may be displayed as the main effect image. It is possible. In the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, a right-handed instruction image M and an award ball count image C1 are displayed.

  The basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. Note that also in FIG. 58, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, usually, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the fluctuation display is basically performed in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of a normal fluctuation (off or small hit). The operation is stopped (see FIG. 58B). The stop in the third stop mode is for the same purpose as in the effect mode C described above. In the effect mode D, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner at the upper right of the display screen 7a, the mode of the variable display is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out of place or big hit) or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed, and the effect design 8 which has been displayed small (reduced display) in the upper right of the screen until then is displayed. A large display is displayed substantially at the center of the screen 7a, and the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left / right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), after the main image X is not displayed, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously, and the middle symbol may be changed (scrolled).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (a staggered pattern) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eye) as a result of the fluctuation display, the 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed, and when the display symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (Reach hit), the 2R big hit game can be executed. Becomes The effects during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, and thus detailed description is omitted here.

  Also, in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, and when the change display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result, the change display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. And is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58B). At this time, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific pattern (small hitting mode) as a result of the variable display (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the fluctuation display accompanying the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in the other effect modes, and the effect image E (effect effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. In this case, the appearance of the effect symbol 8 is mainly displayed to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, the effect design 8 is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific pattern (small hit mode), so that the occurrence of the small hit in the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is not obvious. In this case, the effect is performed in an inconspicuous manner. At this time, an effect image different from the effect symbol 8 can be displayed, and the display of the effect image may suggest (notice) to the player that a small hit has occurred. It is assumed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 59A, a plurality of target images Y can be displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit change. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big winning opening 35 in one small hitting game. In the present embodiment, the target image Y is approximately 2 per small hitting game. Since three to three game balls are designed to be able to enter the second special winning opening 35 (gauge configuration), three target images Y are displayed in response to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect symbol game effect). When the hit variation effect pattern is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this manner, the player can infer that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can also be said to be a notice effect image for notifying occurrence of a small hit. Note that the display of the target image Y may not be included in the variable effect pattern but may be included in the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above.

  Then, when the small hit variation (the variation display of the effect symbol 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (such as "355") is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize to be opened by the small hit game is started. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as a "destructive effect") indicating a state in which the target image Y is destroyed for each incoming ball is performed (see FIG. 59 (b)). The destruction effect is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. And corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect is such that the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from the fighter (the main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the ball entering the second special winning opening 35 is also performed.

  The effect from the start of the small hit change to the small hit game is a basic effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. An effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called “hold prefetch effect” is performed. The reserved prefetch effect relating to the small hit (also referred to as “small hit prefetch effect”) is realized by the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. Specifically, when setting (S4505) the variable effect pattern in the variable effect start process (S4402), the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetch effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, special productions will be held for small hits. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this processing ends without performing the processing of S5002 and thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not during the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is stored as the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol holding), and the second special symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not a hold that results in a small hit (also referred to as “small hit hold”) is stored (S5002). This determination is made with reference to the production suspension information (preliminary determination result and the like) stored in S4402, that is, the storage contents of the production suspension information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit holding, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the changing display of the effect symbol 8 to be started (also referred to as “the relevant change”) (S5002). The small hit holding is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”.

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), the process is terminated without performing the processing of S5003 and thereafter, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined that the change has been made (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not the small hit occurs continuously three or more times as a result of the change display including the change (the change display to be started from now on) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the fluctuation (S5003). This determination can also be made with reference to the effect hold information (storage contents of the effect hold information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

  If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are not stored consecutively (NO in S5003), this processing ends without performing the processing of S5004 and thereafter. In this case, the small hit prefetch effect (small hit continuous announcement) based on the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) is not started. However, if the change is a small hit change corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the change effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the change effect pattern related to the change, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect involving the display of a plurality (three in this example) of target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). In other words, there are cases where three target images Y are displayed as an effect indicating the occurrence of a small hit due to the change (the change notice).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect relating to a small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is performed three or more times in succession, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more continuous fluctuation displays. (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs a start time lottery (a kind of random number lottery for effect determination) to determine whether or not to start the specific time period. (S5004: YES), the process of S5005 to S5007 for starting the specific period is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if two conditions of (1) that three or more small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning in the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions of the specific period.

  When it is determined in S5004 that the specific period starts (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned on (S5006), and the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not to be started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit holdings determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, “3” or “4” is set (S5005). After the specific period counter is set in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) stops (ends). The specific period flag is a flag indicating that a specific period is currently in progress, and is mainly used at the start of a variable effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the occurrence of a second special figure hold (special figure 2 start ball-in command reception). ) Is referred to when storing the effect suspension information based on the above (S4402). After being turned on in S5006, the specific period flag is turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

  In the present embodiment, when three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to set the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and the effect pattern B is set in the case of an affirmative determination. This makes it possible to provide a case where the small hit prefetch effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

  When the small hit prefetch effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit prefetch effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is sent to the image control board 100. Then, the small hit prefetch effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is not displayed, and the character “Get continuous GET !!” is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

  Thereafter, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the variable display, the specific period display area T () displaying the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of acquired prize balls during the specific period. The second display section) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61B). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying three-digit numbers of “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Then, every time one game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hitting game executed in response to the display of the small hitting mode, the number of prize balls paid out for one of the entering balls. The prize ball number image S indicating (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is: It is displayed in addition to the prize ball count image C2 (acquired prize ball number) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). Also, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second winning hole 35 but also the third starting opening 26, the prize ball paid out for each entry (each entry). The award ball number image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is the award ball count image. It is displayed in addition to C2 (the number of acquired prize balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). Accordingly, during the specific period, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are easily performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entering ball effect. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are performed by the main control unit 80 based on the detection of a game ball by the third starting port sensor 26a or the second winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second big winning port ball entry command) by the sub-control unit 90 (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 can occur not only during the small hitting game, the display of the prize ball number image S based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 and the addition of the prize ball count image C2 are performed. The display can also be executed as an effect during the variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game, for example. During the specific period, addition display of the winning ball count image C1 displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display unit) is not performed. This indicates the number of acquired prize balls during a specific period (during the small hit casino period) in which the small hit game is continuously performed three or more times, in distinction from the number of acquired prize balls obtained by the small hit game when not in the specific period. That's why.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above correspond to all of the small hit holdings stored at the start of the specific period (in this embodiment, three or four small hit holdings). ) Is performed until the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit holdings are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T which has been displayed is erased from the screen. At the same time, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the acquired prize ball number indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). Is performed (added) to the number of acquired prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in (1) (see FIG. 61 (e) → (f)). According to the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A, the effect effect (first profit effect, second profit effect) is produced by changing the display mode of the acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount). The effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that the effect display mode based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the prize ball number image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. However, for example, the specific period display area T is displayed in a landscape orientation near the upper left on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. For example, various display modes can be adopted.

  On the other hand, if the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and an effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is performed, with the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 (small hit fluctuation), A plurality of the target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning opening with the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hit holdings (three or four) stored at the time when the variable display is started. 35 is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter. As described above, in the present embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for one small hit game (see FIG. 59A), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Then, nine or twelve target images Y are displayed. In other words, the number of target images Y to be displayed (the effect mode of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the stored number of small hit holdings. Due to the display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display performed continuously a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display becomes a small hit (specific display result). Continuous occurrence of hits) can be suggested to the player. Thereafter, while the small hit game is performed by the number of times corresponding to the number of small hit reservations at the start of the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B, every time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35, A destructive effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y or the destructive effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the number of stored small hits is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second large winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed during the effect of updating based on the small hit change based on the small hit holding, and the display mode of the character image (such as the movement of the character) is changed to the second special winning opening 35. Various effects, such as effects that change based on the entry of a ball, can be set as predetermined effects. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of a predetermined effect) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to select and set any one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetch effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display using the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56B), small hits frequently occur, and the ball enters the second big winning opening 35. (First profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed at a high frequency, so that it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the effect related to the small hit and to improve the game entertainment. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit holdings ("3" or more in the present embodiment), when the specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of the small hit prefetching effect, the The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (the second profit effect) are performed until all the small hit holdings are exhausted and the specific period ends. It is possible to secure the opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty of the display. Then, after the end of the specific period, the acquired prize ball number (the acquired prize ball number during the specific period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is the prize originally displayed on the lower right of the screen (first display unit). It is added (added) to the number of obtained prize balls in the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where a plurality of small hits are held (in this embodiment, “3” or more), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of the small hit prefetch effect. (A small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, a predetermined effect), and the effect mode (the number of target images Y displayed in the present embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, and the like) executed in accordance with the small hit, and to enhance the entertainment interest in the effect mode D (state C). Become.

  Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (missing or big hit) and the reach-inducing variation occur in the effect mode D. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. (Variation display, etc.) are performed (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 58 (a)). In addition, in the case where the reach fluctuation (out of place or big hit) is performed and in the case where the reach out of place change is performed, the main image X is not displayed after the start of the fluctuation display of the effect design 8, and until then, the main image X is displayed in the upper right of the screen. The displayed effect symbol 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen and is displayed in a fluctuating manner by vertical scrolling. Thereafter, the fluctuating display of the effect symbol 8 is switched to the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth symbol. It stops in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and subsequent figures). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined value is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is performed based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect (also referred to as “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is similar to the second effect executed as the reach effect in the above-described effect mode C, in which the friend character and the enemy character are connected. This is a battle effect (showdown effect) depicting a confrontation scene, and includes a plurality of third effect patterns having different patterns of the content of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64B, the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D is roughly classified into a pattern in which the ally character wins (also referred to as a “third effect pattern A”) and a ally character. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as a “third effect pattern B”) and a pattern in which the battle ends without a win or loss (also referred to as a “third effect pattern C”). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of the enemy character, the type of the character performing the first strike, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (friend win pattern) is also referred to as a “first change effect pattern”, and the third effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is also referred to as a “second change effect pattern”. The effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as “third variable effect pattern”. In addition, the third effect (battle effect) pattern includes a strong attack pattern (for example, a type of a weapon used in an attack, a type of a technique, etc.) of each of the ally character and the enemy character. And a pattern with a weak attack power (also called a “weak pattern”). In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which the ally character attacks the enemy character, the strong pattern (also referred to as the “strong ally pattern”) can be won by the ally character compared to the weak pattern (also referred to as the “friendly ally pattern”). It is shown that it is high. Also, among the patterns in which an enemy character attacks an ally character, a strong pattern (also referred to as an “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to win the enemy character than a weak pattern (also referred to as an “enemy weak pattern”). It is intended to indicate that. With these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest the development and results of the battle effect to the player.

  In addition, when the reach fluctuation or the reach-lifting fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D, an image for giving a notice (suggestion) of the content of a subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the change (also referred to as a “notice image”). (See FIG. 65). The display of the preview image is a kind of the preview effect (notification effect pattern) set in the above-described S4506 according to the fluctuating effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-described S4505. When a notice effect (notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by displaying the notice image is selected (set) on the basis of the effect determination table (not shown), a predetermined value is set when executing the variable display (variable effect). Is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the preview image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, and after the reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the mode of the advance announcement effect (announcement effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the preview image due to the fluctuation of the reach deviation is determined from the start of the fluctuation display to the time when the reach is not established (reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol stops). . The reason is that reach cannot be established with fluctuations in reach. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the preview image in the case of the fluctuation in reach reach is set to the start of the fluctuation display. The display of the preview image allows the player to infer the development of the game that can be executed after the change. The display of the preview image may not be based on the preview effect pattern but may be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. In addition, the notice image can be referred to as “information about the game after the end of the fluctuation display”, and the effect of displaying the notice image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

  In this embodiment, when a preview image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65A, a lower portion of the display screen 7a is a preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) that are stopped due to the establishment of the reach are displayed small in the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, respectively. The state (reach state) performed is shown. As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that gives a preview (suggestion) of the occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for informing (suggesting) the continuation of the production mode D (state C), and a notice (suggestion) for transition to the production mode E (state B). And a third notice image 503 (third information). Then, at the start of the display of the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess regarding a later game development, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Also, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the display of the notice image enables the effect mode D (state C). ) Will be announced (suggested) with respect to the game development based on the game described in (1), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the effect mode D (state C). Note that the mode (display position, size, shape, and the like) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 65. For example, the landscape preview image display area U illustrated in FIG. Or a vertically long preview image display area U is provided on the left or right portion of the display screen 7a, and first to third preview images are vertically (up and down) in the preview image display area U. It is possible to adopt various modes such as displaying the images side by side.

  The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters “continuation”, and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters of “mode E”. Is done. In this embodiment, when displaying a preview image, two types of preview images are displayed. As a display pattern (combination of a preview image), that is, a preview effect pattern, a “first preview image 501” illustrated in FIG. And a second notice image 502 ”and a second display pattern that displays the“ second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 ”shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition, a display pattern for displaying the “first notice image 501 and the third notice image 503” may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, three kinds of notice images are provided. More kinds of notice images may be provided, such as providing notice images according to the type of the big hit. In this case as well, at least two types of preview images may be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (notification effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502, and the third preview image 503 is to be displayed depends on the type of the preview effect (notification effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, in the case where the fluctuation in reach reach is performed (reach fluctuation fluctuation effect presentation pattern), the first preview image 501 and the second preliminary image 502 (first display pattern) or the second preliminary image 502 and The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is caused by the stop of the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R). The process is performed until the reach is not established. Then, after the start of the display of the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), if the reach is not established, the preview image that has been displayed up to that point is deleted from the screen. In this case, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern when displaying the preview image is performed by setting the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is performed based on a display pattern determining random number that takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selectivity of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by the display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach deviation fluctuation, both the display of the preview image by the first display pattern and the display of the preview image by the second display pattern can be executed. The latter has a higher feasibility than the latter (selection rate of the first display pattern is “30%” and selection rate of the second display pattern is “70%”).

  On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation production pattern), the variation is a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). In other words, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a zigzag (big hit manner) as a result of the variable display (big hit variation effect pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit manner is displayed (before the derived display). A third effect (variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend win pattern) is performed. In addition, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game is performed, and thereafter, the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (the first fluctuation effect pattern) This is a pattern in which allied characters win. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), for example, at the predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as at the start of the fluctuation or when a reach is established, the display of the preview image (information display effect) Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first advance notice image 501 and the second advance notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player determines at least as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be assumed that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is no possibility that the game in the state C will end (the possibility of the subsequent game development being disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), at that time, the player has a 2R big hit. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that later game development will be disadvantageous).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (the battle effect to win the ally) based on the third effect pattern A due to the big hit change is displayed by the first display pattern more than the second display pattern. The possibility of execution with the display pattern is increased (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the preview image in the first display pattern is higher than the display of the preview image in the second display pattern in that the degree of expectation of the teammate victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect design 8 is displayed in a big hit mode and the big hit. It can be said that the expectation (big hit reliability) that the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. In the case where the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “strong friendship pattern” with the big hit change, the possibility of executing the preview image using the first display pattern is increased. (See FIG. 66).

  When the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is a “strong friendship pattern” and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the start of the display of the preview image (for example, a friend character and an enemy character) It is assumed that the first preview image 501 (big hit) may be displayed larger in the preview image display area U than at the beginning of the display at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the start of the battle of the character or during the battle. (See FIG. 65 (e)). The enlarged display of the preview image is based on the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above. When the preview effect pattern including the enlarged display of the preview image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the preview image is displayed. Done. Further, with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed in a smaller size than at the beginning of the display or is deleted (deleted in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. Thereby, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the strong ally pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the change (battle effect). It is possible to suggest to the player that the score is high, and to enhance the player's sense of expectation and security. When the first notice image 501 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the second notice image 502 is deleted, it is possible to use the display to notify the big hit decision (big hit decision notification). In addition, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the notice image display area is displayed such that the first notice image 501 is further enlarged or the second notice image 502 is deleted. The display mode of the preview image displayed on U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the preview image, for example, the character of “big hit” in the first preview image 501 may be changed to “super-big hit” indicating a 15R big hit, or the character of “big hit” and its background color may be changed. For example, the characters, colors, shapes, and the like constituting the preview image may be changed. Further, the change of the characters and the like and the change of the display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be configured to be executable.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “strong ally pattern”, that is, “the weak ally pattern”, “the strong enemy pattern” or “the weak enemy pattern” In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. It should be noted that even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “strong team pattern”, the first preview image 501 can be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the “strong team pattern” It is only necessary to reduce the possibility of performing the enlarged display (change of the display mode) as compared with. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the preview image.

  Also, when reach fluctuation is performed (reach fluctuation effect pattern), and the fluctuation is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, ie, In the case where the effect symbol 8 is displayed with the reach variation (out-of-reach mode) as a result of the fluctuation display (reach out-of-reach fluctuation effect pattern), before the display of the out-of-way mode (before derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win / loss is not obtained) A third effect (a fluctuating effect based on the third fluctuating effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the departure mode), the third effect pattern C (third fluctuation effect pattern) is confronted without a win or loss (battle). It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the fluctuation (out-of-reach fluctuation), the first advance notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 are displayed at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as at the start of the fluctuation or at the time of reaching a reach. The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed using the first display pattern, the player has no possibility of generating at least a 2R jackpot (the possibility of ending the state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed by the second display pattern, the player is unlikely to generate at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). You can guess. In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect based on the third effect pattern C (the battle effect of undecided winning or losing) is executed due to the out-of-reach fluctuation, the first display pattern and the second display The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the preview image in the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, and thus the game in the state C ends. It does not give the player the anxiety of getting lost. On the other hand, the display of the preview image in the second display pattern (continuation or staging mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that the 2R jackpot occurs, and the game in the state C cannot be continued. Since it also includes sex, such anxiety is given to the player. The display of the preview image in the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are deleted (change in the display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player recognizes that the game in the state C is continued without a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) being generated as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). Can be. Thus, the display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continuation) is finally left in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, the big hit mode is not displayed (the big hit occurs) as a result of the fluctuation display. The enlarged display 501 is not performed. Further, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, after the display of the preview image in the first display pattern or the second display pattern is started, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 may be executed. The second advance notice image 502 is an advance notice image that gives advance notice (suggestion) of continuation of the state C in which small hits frequently occur. Since the continuation possibility of the state C is notified (suggested) in advance, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C ends.

  In the case where reach fluctuation is performed (reach fluctuation effect pattern), the fluctuation is based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a 2R big hit (2R fifth to eighth big hit). When the change is performed as a 2R jackpot change, that is, when the effect design 8 is displayed as a reach variation eye (2R jackpot change effect pattern) as a result of the change display (2R jackpot change effect pattern), before the display of the 2R jackpot change mode (before derivation display) ), A third effect (a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (a friendly defeat pattern) is performed. After the fluctuation display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game of 2R is performed, the game state after the big hit game becomes state B (high base state), and the game in state C is continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated. Then, in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when a reach is established, the second notice image 502 and the second notice image are displayed at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts. Display of the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By displaying the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (the battle effect of ally defeating) based on the third effect pattern B is executed with the 2R big hit variation is not executed in the first display pattern. This is executed only with the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C is terminated by the occurrence of the 2R big hit despite the display of the preview image by the first display pattern (the preview effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development) (relative game). This is because the game development is disadvantageous for the player). By doing so, the display of the preview image and the third effect (battle effect) are coordinated, and when displaying the notice image (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect), the player feels discomfort and distrust. It is possible not to give a feeling.

  Thereafter, the display of the preview image in the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change of the notice image display mode). Thereby, the player recognizes that two big hits (any of the 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C has ended. it can. Thus, the display of the preview image in which only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the effect mode D, when the reach fluctuation or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the contents (game development) of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation are announced (imposed) based on the fluctuation effect pattern related to the fluctuation. The preview image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U). This notice image includes a first notice image 501 (first information) that gives notice (suggestion) of the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) which triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state). And a second advance notice image 502 (second information) for announcing (suggesting) the continuation of the state C, and announcing (suggesting) that the game state shifts to the state B (the end of the game in the state C) triggered by the 2R jackpot. ) (Third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern composed of a combination of 502 and a third notice image 503. The display of the preview image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed in the third effect from the start of the fluctuation before the reach uncertainty is determined in the reach-influenced fluctuation and from the start of the fluctuation in the reach fluctuation. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of the (battle effect) is clarified (before the end of the battle effect or the change), state C (advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur) continues due to the change (victory) Thus, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that stirs up the player's expectations and anxiety, such as whether to end (undecided) or end (defeat). Further, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) (such as a strong ally pattern or a weakly ally pattern) in the fluctuation, the third effect is executed after the display of the preview image is started. At a predetermined time in the middle (during the battle effect), the display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed. Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest to the preview image being displayed, and indicates at an early stage before the end of the change that the later game development is likely to be advantageous to the player, It is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode in the state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low-base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the effect mode to be set is selected. Is performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit occurs which triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state). In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” are the big hits that trigger the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), The effect modes C and D can be selected at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In the present embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the big hit game can be selected from the two effect modes C and D is generated. The occurrence timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period differs between “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” and “15R third big hit”. Note that the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs control processing related to effect mode selection, such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of an effect mode based on operation of the first effect button 63a during the mode selection period. It is executed under control, and specifically, is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left-handed game) and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as an initial hit, Mode selection when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and “4R fourth big hit” occurs, that is, when “4R fourth big hit” occurs as a connected suite The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game have been completed. Here, as described above, when the last round of the jackpot game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the jackpot ending command and (S2116), the big hit ending period starts (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”. It is provided according to the type of big hit. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In the present embodiment, the ending time for the 4R jackpot game is set to “15 seconds”, and the ending time for the 15R jackpot game is set to “5 seconds”. Seconds ". Note that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response, an ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, a mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 (hereinafter, also referred to as “mode C selection image”) indicating “effect mode C” and an image 702 (hereinafter, also referred to as “mode D selection image”) indicating “effect mode D”. Are arranged side by side on the right and left, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as a “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right sides. By displaying such a mode selection screen 700, the player is notified that the mode selection period is being performed.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, an image 701 (mode C selection image) and an image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternately for each operation. The highlighted image (that is, the effect mode) is represented as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In the present embodiment, the mode selection image (effect mode) being selected is displayed (emphasized) in a form surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darker (dark display). I have. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, and selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high-accuracy low-base state). can do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is set to 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started above the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in such a manner that the numeral image 704 is displayed by subtracting 1 from “3” → “2” → “1” at a time. By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the number image 704 becomes “1” in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, thereby ending the mode selection period. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed in a bold frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as an effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). Under the effect symbol game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and the “15R third big hit” occurs, that is, the “15R third big hit” occurs as a series of hits In this case, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R jackpot game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R among 1R to 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , The sub control unit can recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, “1R start command”, “2R start command”... “15R start command”.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives a “13R start command” designating the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of the 13R, Is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response, a 13R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63A, the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period starts from the next round (14R in the present embodiment) (notification before the start of the selection period, first notification means). In this way, after the effect that the selection of the effect mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started) is notified in advance, the effect mode of the effect mode in a new mode such as the occurrence (start) of the effect mode selection period is reached. Selection is possible. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the effect mode selection.

  The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image indicating the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1, and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each ball entered based on the ball entry into the first large winning opening 30 during reception of the big hit game (reception of the first large winning opening ball entry command). It is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game is over, and then enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game or the first big game in the big hit game. The addition display is also performed when the ball enters the winning opening 30. Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 displays the total number of obtained prize balls during the extended period from the initial hit.

  Next, upon receiving the “14R start command” designating the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). I do. In response to this, a 14R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63B, the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. The mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as that of the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above. I have. With the display of the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode is being selected (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (upside-down switching of the mode selection image) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, a detailed description of the effect mode selection in the 14R will be omitted. Note that the screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed during the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode may be displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, upon receiving a “15R start command” designating the start of the 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ). In response to this, a 15R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, a countdown display starts at the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62 (c)), and the numerical image changes from “3” to “2” as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), and the mode selection period ends.

  Thereafter, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. The selected production mode (C or D) is set as the production mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) production mode (C or D) Under the effect design game effect is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to the “effect mode C” at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. ”Or“ effect mode D ”occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, a 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left-handed game) and a 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right-handed game). The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the timing of the mode selection period differs between the initial hit in state A, which is a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played, and the continuous hit in state B or C, which is a gaming state in which a right-handed game is played. It has become something. In other words, the type of the jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, the 4R jackpot game (4R first jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot) or the 15R jackpot game (15R third jackpot) , The occurrence time of the mode selection period differs. For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive play) or the type of the big hit game to be executed, the timing at which the effect mode selection becomes possible is changed, It is possible to change the mode.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games are completed, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) from 14R to 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in 13R before (before start) the mode selection period occurs. Then, a notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period starts from the next round is displayed (notification before the start of the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This is displayed (notification during the selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and a countdown display is executed at 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c), (d)). As described above, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after all round games have been completed, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the effect mode before all round games have ended. Given to. This makes it possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

  Also, the ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period in the 4R jackpot. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible a negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of acquired prize balls) is small and the execution period of the jackpot game is short as compared with the 15R jackpot, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the player is prompted to select an effect mode after the big hit game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). I have. For this reason, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from the start to the end of the mode selection period, the notification (selection period) Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, and notification before the end of the selection period) are performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Direction in low-probability low-bass condition]
Hereinafter, the main effects performed in the low-probability low-base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. Here, FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the effect performed in the low-probability low-bass state. FIG. 68 is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating a specific example of the effect performed in the low-probability low-base state. FIG. 69 is a screen diagram (part 2) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low-probability low base state. FIG. 70 is a screen diagram (part 3) showing a specific example of the effect performed in the low-probability low base state.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes, as the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, display screens 71 a and 72 a having a vertical width An image display device that is sufficiently narrower than the vertical width of the first display screen 7a (of one image display device 7) is provided. On the premise of this configuration, when the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a are illustrated together, the images displayed on the display screens 71a, 72a become small, and the visual recognition of the images becomes small. It may be difficult. Therefore, in the screen diagrams after FIG. 68, for the sake of convenience, the vertical widths of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a are made substantially the same as the vertical width of the first display screen 7a. 3 illustrates an image displayed on the display screen.

In the following description based on FIGS. 67 to 84, for the sake of convenience, the first effect holding 9 a indicating that the first special symbol right / wrong judgment has been held is simply referred to as “holding icon”, and this holding icon is The display area to be displayed is referred to as a suspended icon display area 9c (in place of the first effect suspension display area 9c). Further, “the icon” as a change suggestion image indicating that the first special symbol and the first effect symbol 8 are being changed and displayed is displayed in the icon display area 9e (for example, see FIG. 68A). The description is made assuming that:
Each effect described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 84 includes a variable effect in the variable effect pattern set by the variable effect pattern setting process in step S4505 in FIG. 52 and a notice effect setting process in step S4506 in FIG. Is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, and the image control board 100 performs processing based on the variable production start command. You.

  In FIG. 68 (A), in order to inform that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “losing”, the break of “526” is displayed. A state where the first effect image 8 shown is stopped and displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponding to the earliest hold icon (the hold icon indicated by a black circle in FIG. 68A) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed, The first special symbol is variably displayed on the 1 special symbol display 41a, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e. At the same time, the shift display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIGS. 67 (A) and 68 (B)). Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 7b, a part of the symbol sequence of the effect symbol in which the numbers “1” to “9” are sequentially written vertically from bottom to top is horizontally arranged in three rows. As the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of three symbol columns is started so that these symbol columns scroll from top to bottom.

  Here, when the result of the first special symbol right / wrong judgment performed at the start of the first special symbol change display is “losing” and it is determined that the reach effect is not to be executed, the first special symbol change display is performed. At the end of the game, three rendering symbols indicating a ragged pattern (for example, “458”) are pseudo-stopped, and the three rendering symbols are permanently stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. (See FIG. 67 (B)).

  Here, "simulated stop" means swinging the effect symbol on the spot without moving it, and "final stop" means stopping the effect symbol completely.

  On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is “big hit” or when it is determined to perform a reach effect for “losing”, for example, the effect is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. A predetermined left symbol (for example, four symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column of the symbol display area 7b, and then a right symbol (for example, four symbols) showing the same symbol as the left symbol is displayed in the right column of the symbol symbol display area 7b. A pre-reach effect to perform a pseudo stop is performed. Then, as a result of such a pre-reach effect, when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped, reach is established (see FIG. 67 (C)).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a so-called pseudo continuous effect may be performed as a pre-reach effect before such reach is established. This pseudo continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the effect symbol was displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b in a plurality of times during one special symbol change display. When the pseudo continuous production is executed before the reach is established, the following production display is performed.

  That is, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, first, the left symbol (for example, four symbols) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (C)), and subsequently, the right symbol is switched to the right symbol. , A different right symbol (for example, one symbol) is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (D)), and thereafter, seven symbols are pseudo-stopped as middle symbols notifying the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 68 (E)). .

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the execution of the pseudo continuous production is notified by pseudo stopping the seven symbols in the middle row, but in other embodiments, the player performs the pseudo continuous production such as “NEXT”. The execution of the pseudo consecutive effects may be notified by pseudo-stopping the recognizable special symbols in the middle row.

  As described above, if seven different symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the different symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuation effect following the pseudo-first fluctuation effect is started. You. Specifically, after the character of “× 2” indicating the start of the fluctuating effect of the pseudo second series is largely displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the character of “× 2” is displayed on the first display screen 7a. The small display is displayed in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted (see FIG. 68 (F)).

  If a fluctuation effect pattern that establishes a reach during the pseudo second-time fluctuation effect is set at the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol this time, a predetermined time period is set after the pseudo second-time fluctuation effect is started. When the time elapses, first, the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 68 (G)), and then the right symbol (for example, two symbols) that is the same as the left symbol is pseudo-stopped to reach. This is true (see FIG. 68 (H)).

  Note that, up to this point, an example has been described in which the “pre-reach pseudo-ream” in which the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row before the reach is established, and a pseudo-sequence effect is performed, but the same symbol is used as the left symbol and the right symbol. After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, there is also a case where a "simple post-reach pseudo-ream" in which seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row to execute a pseudo-continuous effect.

  As described above, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established, the player is expected to stop the same effect symbol as these effect symbols (reach symbol) in the middle row. A predetermined reach effect to be performed is performed. In this embodiment, as a reach effect that can be executed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state, as illustrated in FIG. 67, a normal short reach, a normal long reach, a first SP reach, a first SP reach, Five types of reach effects, 2SP reach and SPSP reach, are prepared.

  The normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) is a reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). The normal short reach is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than a normal long reach described later. When the reach is established, first, the normal short reach is performed (see FIGS. 67 (C) and (F)). When this normal short reach is performed, when the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle symbol row gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol or reach symbol as the reach symbol is formed between the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. Scroll display of a middle symbol row in which a different middle symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 68 (I)). In FIG. 68 (I), one symbol "1" less than the reach symbol passes on the effective line between the left symbol and the right symbol, and the same middle symbol (here two symbols) as the reach symbol is an effective line. The example of approaching to is illustrated.

  Here, when a variable effect pattern for reporting a hit is set in the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), a hit notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) is performed in the normal short reach. Specifically, if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “big hit”, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line to thereby prevent the double eyes (for example, “222”). After the effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, a hit notification effect is performed in which these effect symbols are permanently stopped as they are. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the middle symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line to change the effect symbol of the reach-losing eye (for example, “232”). After the pseudo stop, a loss notification effect of permanently stopping these effect symbols as they are is performed.

  On the other hand, when a variable effect pattern that develops from normal short reach to another reach effect is set, the following effect is performed. For example, when a fluctuation effect pattern that informs a hit from the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) to the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)) and is set to the normal long reach, the normal short reach is set. At the end of the reach, a long development suggestion effect (see FIG. 69 (A)) indicating the development to the normal long reach is performed, and the high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is restarted, and the normal long reach (FIG. 67 (H ) See)). In the normal long reach, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), an effect display is performed in which a predetermined character is expected to have the same pattern in the central area of the first display screen 7a.

  Note that the normal long reach is a reach effect having the lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal short reach among the five types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%), and in most cases, the normal long reach. Loss notification production (see FIG. 67 (G)) is performed in normal long reach without developing to other reach productions, but if the result of this first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, normal long reach A hit notification effect (see FIG. 67 (G)) may be performed. When a variable effect pattern that evolves from normal long reach to another reach effect is set, the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) or the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) from normal long reach ) Will be developed.

  Here, the first SP reach is a reach effect having the second lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal long reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 11%). When the first SP reach is developed from the normal long reach to the first SP reach, the following is performed. Effect display is performed. That is, the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row is restarted after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line, and the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that have been pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b are: While being reduced while maintaining the reach state, the first display screen 7a moves to the upper left area and the upper right area, respectively. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

  As described above, in the case where the game has developed to the first SP reach, a hit information presentation effect (see FIG. 67 (K)) for notifying a hit is performed in the first SP reach, and a predetermined development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67). 67 (L)) to SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the case where the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) evolves to the above-mentioned first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) without passing through the normal long reach, , May directly evolve from the normal short reach to the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)).

  Here, the second SP reach is a reach effect with a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the first SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%). When the normal SP reach reaches the second SP reach, the second SP reach is as follows. Effect display is performed. That is, the high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol row is restarted after the same middle symbol as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line, and the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that have been pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b are: While being reduced while maintaining the reach state, the first display screen 7a moves to the upper left area and the upper right area, respectively. Then, in the central area of the first display screen 7a, a predetermined effect display for expecting a big hit is performed.

  In this manner, the first SP reach and the second SP reach have the same screen configuration to display an effect that expects a big hit, but these reach effects have different effect contents. Specifically, in the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), if the own character prevents the attack of the enemy character, the jackpot is won, and if the own character cannot completely prevent the attack of the enemy character, a loss occurs. An effect display is performed. On the other hand, the second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)) is configured as a mission effect, in which if the character succeeds in the mission, a jackpot is obtained, and if the character fails in the mission, a loss effect is displayed. .

  When the first SP reach or the second SP reach is developed, the reliability of the jackpot of these reach effects is relatively low, so that the loss information effect in the hit information effect (see FIG. 67 (K)) is the hit information effect. Easier to implement. For this reason, in the case where the player has developed into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, similarly to the case where the player has developed into the normal long reach, the player can use the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (L)) via the development gimmick effect. 67 (N)).

  Here, the SPSP reach is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the above five types of reach effects. In this embodiment, the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) always evolves via the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) which suggests the development to the SPSP reach. As shown in FIG. 67, an effect pattern in which an evolving gimmick effect occurs immediately after the reach is established and develops into SPSP reach, and an effect pattern in which an evolving gimmick effect occurs during normal long reach and evolves into SPSP reach There is an effect pattern in which an evolving gimmick effect occurs during the first SP reach and develops into SPSP reach, and an effect pattern in which an evolving gimmick effect occurs during the second SP reach and evolves into SPSP reach.

  Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the development gimmick effect to be performed at some timing during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is determined before reaching or immediately after reaching during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, during normal long reach, during first SP reach, during second SP reach, and the like. An announcement effect called a first big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) indicating a relatively high jackpot reliability (jackpot reliability: about 33% (see FIG. 75 (B))) Is performed, and when this first great chance notice is generated, it is easy to develop into a highly reliable reach production (SPSP reach in the present embodiment).

  For this reason, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the player first generates the first large chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)), and thereafter, the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) occurs. You can enjoy playing while expecting to play. The first great chance notice and the rank-up effect that can indicate the occurrence of the first great chance notice will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Also, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the case where the development gimmick effect is directly developed to the SPSP reach, and the case where the development gimmick effect directs the second great chance notice (FIG. 67 (M)) ) To SPSP reach. Since the second big chance notice is a notice effect indicating that the jackpot reliability is extremely high (the possibility of executing the hit information effect is relatively high) (the jackpot reliability: about 58%: FIG. 75 (B)), when the development gimmick effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a subsequent second chance notice to occur.

  Next, a description will be given of a specific example of the effect performed when the development gimmick effect occurs at the end of the normal long reach and the SPSP reach is developed via the second great chance notice. In the case of directly evolving from the normal long reach to the SPSP reach without passing through the first SP reach, for example, at the end of the normal long reach (see FIG. 69 (B)), the staging pattern indicating the reach-losing eye is pseudo-stopped and the loss is lost. A simulated losing effect (see FIG. 69 (C)) is performed. After that, the text of "roulette chance" indicating that a development destination selection effect of selecting the type of SPSP reach to be developed is performed is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)), and the development destination A selection effect (see FIG. 69 (D)) is performed.

  In the case of developing into a development destination selection effect, as illustrated in FIG. 69 (D), a panel corresponding to each of the four types of SPSP reach having different jackpot reliability is displayed. Specifically, a panel corresponding to an A battle in which the player character battles with the enemy character A, a panel corresponding to a B battle in which the player character battles with the enemy character B, and a C battle in which the player character battles with the enemy character C Is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a panel corresponding to the X battle in which the player character battles with the enemy character X is displayed. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 69 (D), in each of the four panels, the degree of expectation that a victory effect will be performed when the corresponding SPSP reach is developed is indicated by the number of stars. It is suggested that the degree of expectation that the victory effect is performed and the jackpot game state is different from each other.

  In addition, when a development destination selection effect is developed, in addition to the four panels, a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and a remaining time of an effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are shown. The validity gauge is displayed. In the case of developing into a development destination selection effect, a roulette effect in which the four panels are sequentially highlighted is started before the validity period starts. FIG. 69D illustrates a state where the panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted. As described above, the validity period is started in a state where the roulette effect is being performed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period, the roulette effect ends, and one of the panels is highlighted. It will be in the state that was done. Then, here, for example, when a panel corresponding to the A battle is highlighted, a development suggestion effect of enlarging and displaying the panel corresponding to the A battle in the center area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 69). (See (E)).

  In the development destination selection effect, the SPSP reach highlighted at the timing when the player operates the first effect button 63a is not necessarily selected, and the effect pattern set at the start of the current symbol change is not always selected. Based on this, one of the panels is selected.

  In this way, when a development suggestion effect indicating that the game is developed to any of the SPSP reach is performed, a development gimmick effect (see FIGS. 67 (L) and 69 (F)) is always performed. This development gimmick production is a production suggesting the development to SPSP by using the movable decorative member 14 as a production feature. In the extended gimmick effect, although not shown in FIG. 69 (F), the movable decorative member 14 moves so as to fall from the initial position to the effect position covering the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the first display is performed. A predetermined developed gimmick effect image is displayed in a peripheral area of the screen 7 a that is not covered by the movable decorative member 14, and a developed gimmick effect sound corresponding to these effects is output from the speaker 67.

  Next, in the case of evolving from the development gimmick effect to the second great chance notice, the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display are displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the movable decorative member 14 returns to the initial position. A predetermined second great chance preview image including the character “Atsu” is displayed on the screen 72a, and a second large chance preview is output in which a predetermined second great chance preview sound is output from the speaker 67. In addition, this 2nd great chance notice may be any type of effect as long as the player can recognize that the jackpot reliability is extremely high, and for example, involves the operation of the movable decorative member 14. There may be. Further, in another embodiment, it may be accompanied by the operation of the directing effect provided on the front frame 51 or the outer frame 53.

  As described above, when the second great chance notice is given following the development gimmick production, the SPSP reach is started. In this SPSP reach, first, a title display for notifying the type of the SPSP reach is performed (see FIG. 69 (H)). In the example shown in FIG. 69, since the panel corresponding to the A battle is selected by the development destination selection effect that can be performed prior to the development gimmick effect, FIG. An example is shown in which a title display suggesting that the game will evolve into SPSP reach (A battle) is performed.

  In the title display performed at the start of the SPSP reach, there are a case where characters constituting the title display are displayed in white, a case where they are displayed in red, and a case where they are displayed in rainbow.

  On the other hand, from the display of the title to the end of the SPSP reach, an effect display indicating a state in which the own character and the enemy character (here, the enemy character A) repeat the attack and defense is performed. Then, when approaching the end of the SPSP reach, a first effect button operation promoting effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed. Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is effective are displayed.

  In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first operation button 63a is operated by the player during the valid period, or the first operation button 63a is not operated, and the first operation button 63a ends the valid period. An effect called cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. This cut-in is an announcement effect indicating the degree of the jackpot reliability, and in this embodiment, a green cut-in (see FIG. 70A) for superimposing and displaying a green cut-in image is executed. Is performed, a red cut-in for superimposing and displaying a red cut-in image (see FIG. 70 (B)) is performed, and a gold cut-in for superimposing and displaying a gold cut-in image (see FIG. 70 (C)). May be performed.

  As described above, when the cut-in occurs and the end of the SPSP reach, the second effect button operation promoting effect (see FIGS. 70 (D) to (F)) for urging the player to operate the second effect button 63b is performed. . During the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, a character “press!” Indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b, and a valid period And a validity gauge indicating the remaining time of the application. In the present embodiment, when the second effect button image indicating the small second effect button 63b is displayed as the second effect button image (see FIG. 70D), the second effect button image having the middle size is displayed. The case where the second effect button image indicating the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)) and the case where the second effect button image indicating the large second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (F)) ).

  When the player operates the second effect button 63b during the validity period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 67 (O)) is provided as an operation corresponding effect in accordance with the operation. Done. In other words, if the result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is a big hit, the winning effect indicating that the own character defeats the enemy character and the simulated stop of the Zoro eye effect design and then the final stop A notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is a loss, the defeat effect indicating that the own character is defeated by the enemy character, and the loss effect in which the effect symbol of the reach loss is pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped. A notification effect is performed.

  The size of the second effect button 63b indicated by the second effect button image displayed during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the second effect button 63b having a medium size When the second effect button image indicating the effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)), the second effect button image indicating the smaller second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (D) )), A hit notification effect (see FIG. 70 (G)) is more easily executed as an operation corresponding effect. Also, when the second effect button image indicating the small second effect button 63b is displayed (see FIG. 70 (D)), the second effect button image indicating the second effect button 63b having a medium size is displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 70 (E)), and the loss notification effect (see FIG. 70 (H)) is more easily executed as the operation corresponding effect.

  Also, the second effect button image showing the large second effect button 63b can be displayed when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment this time is a hit, but is not displayed when the result is a loss. There is. For this reason, it can be said that the second effect button operation promotion effect displaying the second effect button image indicating the large second effect button 63b is a notice effect with a jackpot reliability of 100%.

[About increasing chances during SPSP reach]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a description will be given of an increase in chance during SPSP reach. Here, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for describing an increase in chance during SPSP reach.

  The title display performed at the beginning of SPSP reach (see FIG. 69 (H)) has a jackpot reliability of about 15% when the color of the title display is white, as illustrated in FIG. When the character color is red, the jackpot reliability is about 37%, and when the character color is iridescent, the jackpot reliability is 100%.

  In the present embodiment, a case where the jackpot reliability when displaying the characters constituting the title display in white or red is fixed irrespective of the type of the SPSP reach is described. The jackpot reliability in the case where the characters constituting the display are displayed in white or red may be made different depending on the type of SPSP reach.

  Also, although not shown in the figure, in the middle stage of the SPSP reach, when the effect display indicating that the character and the enemy character repeat the attack and defense is performed, the frame lamp 66 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission color, and In some cases, an effect called a frame flash for outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 67 may be performed. The reliability of the frame flash that causes the frame lamp 66 to emit red light is about 53%, and the frame lamp 66 is rainbow-colored. The reliability of the jackpot of the frame flash that is caused to emit light is 100%.

  Although not shown in the figure, a predetermined music corresponding to the SPSP reach is output from the speaker 67 during the SPSP reach. On the other hand, during the SPSP reach, there may be a chance-up effect called a music change in which this predetermined music is changed to another special music. This music change has a jackpot reliability of about 70%. Is a chance up production.

  Also, as exemplified in FIG. 71, a green cut-in is provided for the operation of the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 69 (I)) during the SPSP reach. The jackpot reliability when it occurs is about 7%, the jackpot reliability when a red cut-in occurs is about 56%, and the jackpot reliability when a gold cut-in occurs is about 71%.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability of the blue cut-in, the red cut-in, and the gold cut-in is fixed irrespective of the type of the SPSP reach is described. May be made different depending on the type of the SPSP reach.

  On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 71, with respect to the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach, an effect of displaying a second effect button image showing a small second effect button 63b (see FIG. 70 (D)). Is about 16%, and the effect of displaying the second effect button image indicating the medium second effect button 63b (see FIG. 70 (E)) has a large jackpot reliability of approximately 55%. The jackpot reliability of the effect (see FIG. 70 (F)) that displays the second effect button image indicating the second effect button 63b is 100%. Although not shown in the figure, a vibration motor for vibrating these effect buttons is provided at a position close to the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and the second effect button at the end of the SPSP reach. In the operation promoting effect, there is a case where an effect of increasing the chance that the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b vibrate before the validity period starts is performed. The production of the chance up utilizing the vibration motor can be performed when the result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is a big hit, but is not performed when the result is a loss. The big hit reliability is 100%. It has become.

[About rank-up production]
Next, the rank-up effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the rank-up effect. FIG. 73 is a screen diagram (part 1) showing a specific example of a rank-up effect. FIG. 74 is a screen diagram (part 2) showing a specific example of the rank-up effect.

  The rank-up effect is a notice effect performed during the change display of the first special symbol, and is configured as a step effect in which the display mode of the character image (for example, see FIG. 73 (D)) is changed step by step. In the present embodiment, the rank-up effect can be changed stepwise up to any of five or less stages with the fifth stage as an upper limit. That is, in this embodiment, the rank-up effect started in the first stage ends in the first stage, and the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the second stage and ends. And the case where the rank-up production started in the first stage finally evolves to the third stage and ends, and the case where the rank-up production started in the first stage finally evolves to the fourth stage. There is a case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fifth stage and ends.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the rank-up effect will be described by taking as an example a case where the rank-up effect started in the first stage finally develops to the fifth stage and ends.

  In FIG. 73 (A), in order to notify that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is “losing”, a break of “445” is displayed. A state in which the effect symbol shown is stopped and displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponding to the earliest hold icon (the hold icon indicated by a black circle in FIG. 73A) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is executed, On the 1 special symbol display 41a, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the first special symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e. At the same time, the shift display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 7b is started (see FIG. 73 (B)). Note that, in the screen diagrams after FIG. 73 (C), the notation of the effect symbols displayed on the first display screen 7a is omitted for convenience of explanation.

  Here, when it is set that the rank-up effect is to be executed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the three symbol columns is started and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. A white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 73C). In this way, when the white character image used for the rank-up effect is displayed, the character movement effect of moving the white character image from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 72A) ) Is performed. Specifically, the white character image displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a is moved to the left (the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 73C), and the left end of the first display screen 7a is moved to the left. At the same time as deleting the white character image that has moved to the first display screen 7a, the white character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIGS. 73C and 73D).

  By performing such a character movement effect, it is possible to make it appear that the white character image displayed on the first display screen 7a has moved to the second display screen 71a. When the rank-up effect is executed, a character image larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a after the character movement effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and the rank-up effect is performed. The production starts.

  For this reason, the player is more likely to notice that the character image has been displayed, compared to the case where the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the rank-up effect is started without performing the character movement effect, and the rank-up operation is performed. It is possible to effectively notify that the effect has started.

  Immediately after the character movement effect is performed, the rank-up effect is in the first stage, and a white character image corresponding to the first stage is displayed on the second display screen 71a (see FIG. 73 (D)). ). On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is changed stepwise after the second stage, a predetermined charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (E), another character image of the same white color as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a (hereinafter, referred to as a “snowman image”) is used as the first character image. An effect display that is displayed on the display screen 7a and shows a manner in which the snowman image throws a white star-shaped item at the character image to inject energy into the character image on the second display screen 71a is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the second stage, the character color change successful effect of changing the part below the knee of the character image to blue corresponding to the second stage (FIG. 72 (C), FIG. 73 ( F) is performed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the second stage, a character color change failure effect in which the display color of the character image does not change from white even when the charge effect is performed (see FIG. 72 (D)) is performed.

  When the rank-up effect is developed from the second stage to the third stage, a second charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (G), the same blue snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and further added to the character image. In order to inject energy, an effect display indicating that the snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item against the character image is performed. When the rank-up effect is developed to the third stage, a character color change that changes a character image in which both feet are blue below the knee to a character image in which both feet are green (corresponding to the third stage) is performed. A successful effect (see FIGS. 72 (C) and 73 (H)) is performed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the third stage, a character color change failure effect in which the display color of the character image does not change from blue even if the charge effect is performed (see FIG. 72 (D)) is performed.

  When the rank-up effect is developed from the third stage to the fourth stage, a third charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 73 (I), the same green snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and further added to the character image. In order to inject energy, an effect display indicating that the snowman image throws a green star-shaped item against the character image is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the fourth stage, a character color change successful effect of changing the character image in which both feet are green to a character image in which other than both hands are red (corresponding to the fourth stage) ( FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 74 (A) are performed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect is not developed to the fourth stage, a character color change failure effect in which the display color of the character image does not change from green even if the charge effect is performed (see FIG. 72D).

  When the rank-up effect is developed from the fourth stage to the upper limit fifth stage, a fourth charge effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 74 (B), the same red snowman image as the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and further added to the character image. In order to inject energy, an effect display indicating that the snowman image throws a red star-shaped item against the character image is performed. Then, when the rank-up effect is developed to the fifth stage, a character color change successful effect of changing the character image that is red except for both hands to a golden character image (corresponding to the fifth stage) ( FIG. 72 (C) and FIG. 74 (C) are performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing a rank-up effect, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a to start the rank-up effect, and after the start of the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed. A configuration is employed in which an image is displayed on the second display screen 71a to change the character image. As described above, since the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a prior to the display of the character image on the second display screen 71a, the start of the rank-up effect can be easily notified. . Also, since a movement effect is performed in which the character image appears to move from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen 71a, the line of sight of the player watching the first display screen 7a is displayed on the second display screen 71a. It is possible to guide to.

  Up to this point, the case where the rank-up effect has evolved to the fifth stage of the upper limit has been described. However, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the jackpot game will be executed in accordance with the rank-up effect having evolved to the fifth stage. A configuration is adopted in which a first big chance notice indicating that there is a certain event is executed. Specifically, when the rank-up effect finally evolves to the fourth or lower stage and ends, that is, the display color of the character image finally changes to a color of red or lower, and the rank-up effect ends. In this case, there is a case where the first great chance notice is executed after the rank-up effect ends (see FIG. 72 (G)) and a case where the first big chance notice is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the rank-up effect finally evolves to the fifth stage and ends, that is, when the display color of the character image finally changes to gold and the rank-up effect ends, the rank-up effect is ended. Is completed, the first big chance notice is always executed (see FIGS. 72 (C) and (F)). From this, when the rank-up effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in which the first great chance notice is not executed, the rank-up effect that eventually develops to the fifth stage is not executed. Finally, a rank-up effect that only develops to the fourth stage or lower will be executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which, when a rank-up effect that finally evolves to the fifth stage of the upper limit and ends is executed, the first great chance notice is always executed thereafter. Therefore, when the display color of the character image changes to gold, a countdown effect (see FIG. 72 (E)) for counting down and displaying the remaining time immediately before the start of the first great chance notice is also performed. Has been adopted.

  For this reason, when a character color change successful effect of changing the display color of the character image to gold (see FIG. 74 (C)) is performed, the phrase “until a large chance notice” is displayed from the first display screen 7a to the second display screen. A moving display is performed to make it appear as if it is moving to 71a (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)). Then, immediately above the icon display area 9e, a white “4” number indicating that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the execution of the first great chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) is 4 seconds. Is displayed (see FIG. 74 (D)), and every time one second elapses from the display of the countdown effect image, the number indicated by the countdown effect image is changed to “4”, “3”, “2”. , "1", and "0", a countdown effect is performed (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)).

  In FIG. 74, since the remaining time from the change of the display color of the character image to gold to the timing immediately before the execution of the first big chance notice is 4 seconds, the number indicated by the countdown effect image is Although the case where the initial value is “4” is illustrated, the remaining time from the change of the display color of the character image to gold to the timing immediately before the execution of the first great chance notice is variable. The initial value of the number indicated by the countdown effect image is also variable. That is, for example, a countdown effect may be performed from “5” or a countdown effect may be performed from “3”.

  As described above, when the countdown effect related to the rank-up effect is performed and the number indicated by the countdown effect image becomes “0”, the character image changed to gold moves from the second display screen 71a to the first display screen 7a. A character movement effect (see FIG. 74 (H)) appears to be performed. When the golden character image moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a by the character movement effect, an effect image indicating that the character image is full of power is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and " The character "Large Chance" is displayed on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 74 (I)), and a predetermined sound effect corresponding to the first large chance notice is output from the speaker 67. .

  The first great chance notice may be executed even if the rank-up effect is not performed, but a countdown effect image related to the rank-up effect is displayed immediately above the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. When a countdown effect that counts down the number indicated by the countdown effect image is executed, a first great chance notice is executed in response to the end of the countdown effect.

  In addition, when the display color of the character image finally changes only to the color red or lower, the first great chance notice may be executed, but the first large chance notice may not be executed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the display color of the character image finally changes only to the color red or less, even if the first large chance notice is executed, immediately before the first large chance notice is executed. The above-described countdown effect based on the timing of is not executed.

  As described above, when the first big chance notice occurs during the change display of the first special symbol, a second big chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) is generated thereafter, or gold is paid at the end of the SPSP reach. Cut-in (see FIG. 70C) may occur. For this reason, when the first great chance notice occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the second great chance notice and the gold cut-in to be combined.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73 to FIG. 74, an example has been described in which the rank-up effect evolves one step at a time, but the rank-up effect is performed by one charge effect and character color change effect. It may evolve in multiple stages. For example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) indicating that a snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item on the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed, both hands are removed. In some cases, a character color change success effect in which a part of the character image changes to red (see FIG. 74A) may be performed. Further, for example, when a charge effect (see FIG. 73 (G)) indicating that a snowman image throws a blue star-shaped item on the blue character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is performed, In some cases, a character color change successful effect in which the entire image changes to gold (see FIG. 74 (C)) may be performed.

(Effects of rank-up effects)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the rank-up effect is started, the character image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem of not being aware of the start of the rank-up effect. Further, after the start of the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a (instead of the central area of the first display screen 7a), so that the display area where the character image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to execute a rank-up effect that is more interesting and more varied than in the case where it is present. After the start of the rank-up effect, the character image is displayed on the second display screen 71a instead of the central area of the first display screen 7a. Can be executed, and a high effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect of the rank-up effect and other effects.

  In the present embodiment, the character image displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a is larger than the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a. Therefore, when the size of these effect images is the same, or when the character image displayed on the second display screen 71a is larger than the character image displayed on the central area of the first display screen 7a. In comparison, it is easy for the player to recognize that the rank-up effect has started, and the player cannot notice that the rank-up effect has started, so that the original effect of the rank-up effect cannot be obtained. Problems can be effectively suppressed.

  In addition, when the rank-up effect develops to the fifth stage, the first great chance notice is executed, so that the player can expect that the rank-up effect develops to the upper limit of the fifth stage. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by a synergistic effect of the notification of the first great chance and the first great chance notice.

(Features of rank-up production)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for describing the jackpot reliability of various announcement effects such as a rank-up effect, and FIG. 75 (A) illustrates characteristics of the rank-up effect. As illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes white is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 1%, and the display color of the character image is When a rank-up effect that finally turns blue is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 2%. Further, when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes green is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 4%, and the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red is performed. If performed, the jackpot reliability is about 23%. If a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes gold is performed, the jackpot reliability is about 45%.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes gold is performed, until the timing immediately before the execution of the first great chance notice is performed. A countdown effect in which the remaining time is displayed in a countdown manner is performed, while a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red or less is performed. The feature is that the countdown effect is not performed.

  Also, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red is performed, or when the display color of the character image finally becomes gold, When a performance is performed, it has the characteristic that it will always develop into SPSP reach. In other words, there is a feature that a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes red or gold is performed only when a variable effect pattern that eventually develops into SPSP reach is set.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (A), when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes gold is performed, the first great chance notice is given with a 100% probability thereafter. Will happen. This is as described above. On the other hand, when the display color of the character image finally remains white, the probability that the first large chance notice will occur thereafter is extremely low, and a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes blue is achieved. If performed, a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes green is performed, and a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image is finally red is performed, Later, the probability of occurrence of the first great chance notice increases.

  That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the first big chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) indicating that the possibility of executing the jackpot game is relatively high. In the rank-up effect, when displaying a white character image, when displaying a blue character image, and when displaying a green character image, the character image indicating that there is a possibility that a jackpot game may be executed. There are times when displaying, displaying a red character image, and displaying a golden character image. In the case where a golden character image is displayed, the first great chance notice is most easily executed. I have.

(Modified example of rank-up production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the rank-up effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the charge effect of changing the display color of the character image using the snowman image different from the character image is described as an example, but in other embodiments, for example, the second display screen 71a A character image (common character image) common to the character image displayed on the first display screen 7a is displayed, and the common character image moves toward the character image and is integrated with the character image. An effect may be performed to change the display color of the character image.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display color of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the size of the character image is changed stepwise, or the shape of the character image is changed. It may be changed stepwise. In another embodiment, any two of the display color, size, and shape of the character image are changed in a stepwise manner, or the three colors of the display color, size, and shape of the character image are changed. May be changed stepwise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the display color of a part of the character image is changed stepwise has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the display color of the entire character image is changed stepwise. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the character image is changed stepwise as the step effect image has been described as an example, but the step effect image is not limited to the character image. You may make it change.

(Reliability of jackpot for each production pattern)
FIG. 75 (B) exemplifies the jackpot reliability when each preview effect is performed alone and the jackpot reliability when each preview effect is combined. As illustrated in FIG. 75 (B), when the first great chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 33%. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 75 (B), when a rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes golden is performed and then the first great chance notice is performed, The jackpot reliability based on these two types of notice effects is about 49%, which is higher than the case where the first big chance notice is executed alone.

  For this reason, it is possible to expect the player to combine the rank-up effect in which the display color of the character image finally becomes golden and the first great chance notice, and the synergistic effect of these notice effects makes it possible to increase the effect. It is possible to obtain a production effect.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a first big chance notice as shown in FIG. 75 (B) as a notice effect indicating that the possibility of the jackpot game being executed is relatively high. In addition, there is a case where a second big chance notice is given or a gold cut-in is made. When the second big chance notice is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 58%, and the gold cut-in is given. Is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 58%.

  On the other hand, when the first great chance notice (see FIG. 67 (E)) and the second great chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) are combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability by these two kinds of notice effects is produced. The degree is about 66%, and the first big chance notice is executed alone (big hit reliability: about 33%) or the second big chance notice is executed alone (big hit reliability: about 58%) ), The jackpot reliability is higher. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to expect that these notice effects are combined, instead of executing either the first great chance notice or the second great chance notice. A high stage effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the second great chance notice.

  When the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, three kinds of the first big chance notice, the second big chance notice, and the gold cut-in are displayed during the fluctuation display of the symbol corresponding to the hit / fail judgment. Can be combined. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a loss, a notice effect pattern that combines the above three kinds of notice effects is not set during the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the hit judgment. . That is, when the result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is a loss, the selection of the notice effect pattern that combines the above three kinds of notice effects is limited. Therefore, when the first great chance notice and the second great chance notice are combined within the same fluctuation, the jackpot reliability is about 66%, whereas the first great chance notice, the second great chance notice, When the gold cut-in and the gold cut-in are combined within the same fluctuation, the reliability of the jackpot based on these announcement effects is 100%.

  For this reason, when the first great chance notice occurs, it is expected that the second great chance notice will occur, and when these great chance notices occur, it is expected that the gold cut-in will occur. Thus, it is possible to expect the player to combine these three kinds of notice effects, and it is possible to obtain an extremely high effect due to the synergistic effect of these three kinds of notice effects.

[Specific example of the first countdown effect]
Next, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 76 and 77 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the first countdown effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first countdown effect image showing a predetermined number is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy low base state, and the first countdown effect image is displayed. There is a case where a first countdown effect for counting down the number indicated by the effect image is executed. When the first countdown effect is executed, a predetermined first suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that the jackpot game is executed is executed according to the end of the first countdown effect.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of the first countdown effect will be described by taking as an example a case where three first countdown effects are executed during one change display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low base state.

  FIG. 76 (A) illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the corresponding icon, and the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon has been started. Have been. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, the first countdown used for the first countdown effect is displayed in the display area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. The effect image is displayed (see FIG. 76 (B)). Since the first countdown effect has not been started for the first time, the first countdown effect image showing the characters “waiting” is displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c in FIG. Is exemplified.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of first countdown effects are executed during one change of the first special symbol, the first countdown effect is provided to suggest that fact. 76B can be displayed on the second display screen 71a indicating that the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended. In FIG. 76B, the execution of the first countdown effect three times is suspended. In this example, a state in which three suggestion images including the characters “waiting” are displayed on the second display screen 71a is shown to suggest that the image is displayed.

  After the first countdown effect image related to the first first countdown effect is displayed, when the start timing of the first first countdown effect is reached, the first countdown effect image indicating the character “waiting” is displayed. In response to the end of the first countdown effect, the image is changed to a first countdown effect image indicating the remaining time until immediately before the execution of the first suggestion effect (see FIGS. 76 (B) and (C)). Here, since the first first countdown effect has been started, it is displayed on the second display screen 71a in FIGS. 76 (B) and (C) (the first first countdown effect). The example in which the suggestion image is deleted from the second display screen 71a is illustrated.

  FIG. 76 (C) illustrates a state immediately after the suggestion image corresponding to the first first countdown effect is deleted, but two suggestion images are displayed on the second display screen 71a. Since the game is left as it is, the player can easily recognize that two first countdown effects are performed after the first first countdown effect is completed.

  In FIG. 76 (C), the first countdown effect indicating the number “8:51” is shown in order to indicate that the remaining time until the timing immediately before the first suggestion effect is executed is 8.51 seconds. Although a state in which an image is displayed is illustrated, in the present embodiment, this number may be displayed in white or in red, and the latter has a greater jackpot reliability than the former. Is high.

  When the first first countdown effect is started in this way, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image decreases with the lapse of time, and finally the number “0:00” is changed. (D in FIG. 76). Then, here, since the above-described pseudo continuous effect is executed immediately after the first first countdown effect is completed (as a first suggestive effect), the number “0:00” indicated by the first countdown effect image Is switched to the character "NEXT" (see FIGS. 76 (D) and (E)), and when the character "NEXT" is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, one second), prior to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Then, the first countdown effect image is deleted from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76 (E) and (F)).

  Next, when the first countdown effect image is deleted from the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 76 (F), the left six symbols, the right two symbols, and the middle seven symbols are simultaneously pseudo-stopped. A pseudo continuous production is performed. Then, in order to start the pseudo-second series of variable productions following the pseudo-first series of variable productions, the character "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo-second series of variable productions is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a. After this, the character "x2" is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is restarted (FIG. 76 (F)). ) And (G)).

  When the pseudo second consecutive variable effect is started, the second first countdown effect that has been suspended is immediately started. For this reason, as illustrated in FIGS. 76 (F) and (G), the first countdown effect image indicating the number “8:51” is newly added to the area immediately above the reserved icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a. And the suggestion image corresponding to the second first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

  In this manner, when the second first countdown effect is started in conjunction with the start of the pseudo second consecutive variable effect, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is counted down. Then, for example, at the timing immediately after the reach is established in one symbol, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image becomes “0:00” (see FIG. 76 (H)), and immediately thereafter, the first countdown effect image is displayed. The numeral “0:00” shown is switched to the character “NEXT” (see FIGS. 76 (H) and (I)), and when the character “NEXT” is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, one second), the pseudo serial number is displayed. Prior to the execution of the effect, the first countdown effect image is deleted from the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 76 (I) and 77 (A)).

  Next, when the first countdown effect image is deleted from the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 77 (A), the middle between the left one symbol and the right one symbol that has been pseudo-stopped earlier. A second pseudo consecutive effect of pseudo stopping seven symbols is performed (see FIG. 77 (A)). Then, in order to start the pseudo-third-series variable production following the pseudo-second-series fluctuation production, the character “x3” indicating the start of the pseudo-third-series fluctuation production is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a. After this, the character "x3" is displayed small in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is restarted (FIG. 77 (A)). ) And (B)).

  When the pseudo-third variable effect is started, the third first countdown effect that has been suspended is immediately started. Therefore, as illustrated in FIGS. 77 (A) and (B), a first countdown effect image indicating the number of “29:71” is newly displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c, and The suggestion image corresponding to the third first countdown effect displayed on the second display screen 71a is deleted.

  In this way, when the third first countdown effect is started in conjunction with the start of the third pseudo fluctuation effect, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image is counted down (see FIG. 77 (C)). . FIG. 77 (C) illustrates an example in which a reach is established in three symbols after the pseudo-third consecutive fluctuation effect is started, and the third first countdown effect is executed during the normal short reach. Have been.

  Here, when a variable effect pattern that evolves from the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)) to the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)) is set, the first countdown effect image is displayed during the first SP reach. The number shown reaches “0:00” (see FIG. 77 (D)), and immediately after that, the number “0:00” indicated by the first countdown effect image is switched to the characters “SPSP” (FIG. 77 ( D) and (E)). Then, when the character “SPSP” is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, one second), the first countdown effect image is displayed on the first display before the development gimmick effect notifying the development to SPSP reach is executed. It is deleted from the screen 7a (see FIGS. 77 (E) and (F)). Then, the above-described development gimmick effect is executed based on FIG. 67 (L) and FIG. 69 (F) (see FIG. 77 (F)), and when SPSP reach is developed, a title is displayed in the early stage thereof (FIG. 77). (G)). FIG. 77 (G) illustrates an example in which a title display indicating that the player character develops into an SPSP reach (X battle) that battles with enemy character X is performed. When the SPSP reach is developed in this manner, a first effect button operation promoting effect for generating a cut-in (see FIG. 77 (I)) is performed toward the end of the process (see FIG. 77 (H)). The first effect button operation promoting effect and cut-in are as described above with reference to FIG. 69 (I) and FIGS. 70 (A) to (C).

(Features of the first countdown effect)
FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for describing the features of the first countdown effect. As illustrated in FIG. 78 (A), when the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches “0:00”, immediately after that, the number “0:00” indicates the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The case of switching to the character of “NEXT”, the case of switching the character of “0:00” to the character of “SPSP” suggesting the development to SPSP reach, and the case of the numeral of “0:00” to the X battle of SPSP reach There is a case where the character is switched to the word "final battle" which indicates the development of the game.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78A, when the first countdown effect in which the number of “0:00” is switched to the character of “NEXT” is executed, the jackpot reliability is approximately 6%. Further, when the first countdown effect in which the number of “0:00” is switched to the character of “SPSP” is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 30%. When the first countdown effect in which the number of “0:00” is switched to the character of “final battle” is executed, the jackpot reliability is about 55%.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the case where the first countdown effect indicating execution of the pseudo continuous effect is executed and the case where the first countdown effect indicating development to SPSP reach is executed And a first countdown effect indicating the development of SPSP Reach into an X battle may be executed. The case where the third first countdown effect is executed has the highest jackpot reliability and the second countdown effect is second. When the first countdown effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is high next. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while expecting that the characters “final battle” and “SPSP” are displayed immediately after the number indicated by the first countdown effect image reaches “0:00”. be able to.

  The timing at which these “NEXT” characters, “SPSP” characters, and “final battle” characters are displayed is not particularly limited, but the “NEXT” characters are executed by, for example, the pre-reach pseudo-run. This is displayed at the timing immediately before the execution or the timing immediately before the post-reach pseudo-run is executed. Further, the character “SPSP” may be displayed at various timings, for example, at a timing immediately before the development gimmick effect is executed, at the end of the normal long reach, at the end of the first SP reach, or at the end of the second SP reach. Further, the character of “final battle” can be displayed, for example, during a period from when the development gimmick effect is performed to when it develops to SPSP reach.

  Although the first countdown effect that suggests the execution of another notice effect has been described above, the number “0:00” indicated by the first countdown effect image is a big hit such as “opportunity” or “hard hit”. There is a possibility that a game is executed, and a first countdown effect that changes to a character indicating the degree of the possibility may be performed. Finally, the jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect displaying the character of "opportunity" is about 8%, and the jackpot reliability of the first countdown effect displaying the character of "super hot" is approximately 71%. It is. These characters are displayed, for example, at a timing immediately before the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is executed or at a predetermined timing during the SPSP reach. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the character “Atsu” instead of “Opportunity” is displayed at these timings.

  Further, as exemplified in FIG. 78 (B), in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first countdown effect is executed once during the single fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low base state. Is performed, the first countdown effect is executed twice, and the first countdown effect is executed three times as described above with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. And the jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed once within the same fluctuation is about 7%, and the jackpot reliability when the first countdown effect is executed twice within the same fluctuation is about 14%. %, And the jackpot reliability in the case where the first countdown effect is executed three times within the same variation is about 65%. In addition, when the first countdown effect is performed three times within the same fluctuation, there is a feature that the development to the X battle with the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of SPSP reach becomes rich.

  For this reason, when the first countdown effect occurs, the player can enjoy the game while expecting two more first countdown effects to occur within the same fluctuation.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 76, by displaying the suggestion image indicating that the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended on the second display screen 71a, the first countdown effect is not immediately executed. When two first countdown effects are simultaneously stocked, the jackpot reliability is about 20%, and when three first countdown effects are simultaneously stocked (see FIG. 76 (B )) Is about 69%. If three first countdown effects are stocked at the same time, three first countdown effects will be executed within the same fluctuation. Therefore, in this case, the development to the X battle is also rich. become.

(Modification of first countdown effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the first countdown effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which, when the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended, a suggestion image indicating that fact is displayed on the second display screen 71a, but in other embodiments, Alternatively, the suggestion image may be displayed on the first display screen 7a. In this case, for example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a suggestion image is displayed in a region above the icon display region 9e on the first display screen 7a.

  Also, in FIGS. 76 (B) and 76 (C), a first countdown effect image showing the character “waiting” is displayed for the first first countdown effect, and then the character “waiting” is changed to “8”. : 51 ", the first countdown effect is started after the example has been described, but the character" standby "is not displayed, and the first countdown effect image is displayed when the first countdown effect image is displayed. It may be started immediately.

  Also, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the case where the execution of the first countdown effect after the second time is not suspended (the character “Waiting” is not displayed) has been described as an example, but the first countdown effect after the second time. As for the effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the execution of the first countdown effect can be suspended, as in the first first countdown effect.

[First specific example of second countdown effect]
Next, a first specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Here, FIG. 79 is a screen diagram showing a first specific example of the second countdown effect.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)) indicating a predetermined number is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy low-base state. A second countdown effect that is displayed and counts down the number indicated by the second countdown effect image may be executed. When the second countdown effect is executed, a predetermined second suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that the jackpot game may be executed is executed according to the end of the second countdown effect.

  FIG. 79 (A) illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c has been shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon has been started. Have been. When a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, a second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79). (B)). FIG. 79 (B) illustrates a state where a large red “5” number is displayed as an initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect.

  When the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect image is displayed in this way, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image decreases by “1” in the order of 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 and finally Is in a state indicating the number "1" (see FIG. 79 (C)). Then, when about one second has elapsed since the second countdown effect image indicating the number of “1” is displayed, a first effect button operation promoting effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed ( FIG. 79 (D)). When the effective period of the first effect button operation promoting effect starts, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and the remaining time of the effective period are shown. The validity gauge is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, a pseudo-second sequence of variable effects is started as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to this button operation. Is displayed in a large area in the center area of the first display screen 7a, and the character of "storm mode" indicating that the effect mode has shifted to the storm mode described later is displayed in the second area. 3 is displayed on the display screen 72a (see FIG. 79 (E)). Then, as illustrated in FIG. 79 (F), the character of “× 2” is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is restarted. As a result, the fluctuating effect of the second pseudo sequence is started.

  If the first effect button 63a is not operated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period at the timing when the effective period ends. The same effect (operation-response effect as illustrated in FIG. 79 (E)) is performed.

[Second specific example of second countdown effect]
Next, a second specific example of the second countdown effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 80 is a screen diagram showing a second specific example of the second countdown effect. FIG. 80 (A) illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon has been started. Have been. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, a second countdown effect image used for the second countdown effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 80). (B)). Note that the initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is fixed to “5”, and FIG. 80 (B) shows a large red “5” number as in FIG. 79 (B). The state where the second countdown effect image is displayed is illustrated.

  When the second countdown effect image according to the second countdown effect image is displayed in this manner, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image is “1” as in the first specific example described above with reference to FIG. 79. It gradually decreases and finally reaches a state indicating the number of “1” (see FIG. 80 (C)). Then, when about one second has elapsed since the second countdown effect image indicating the number “1” is displayed, a first effect button operation promoting effect similar to that of FIG. 79 (D) is performed (FIG. 80 (D)). )reference).

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the second countdown effect is executed again as an operation corresponding to the button operation. The second countdown effect image showing the red “5” number indicating the “” is largely displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (E)). As described above, when the second countdown effect image relating to the second countdown effect is displayed, the second second countdown effect is performed (see FIGS. 80 (E) to (F)).

  Thereafter, the second second countdown effect proceeds, and when the number indicated by the second countdown effect image becomes “1”, immediately after that, the second first countdown effect image prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a. An effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 80 (G)).

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the second first effect button operation promotion effect, it indicates that the development destination selection effect is executed as the operation-response effect. The character "roulette chance" is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 80 (H)), and the same development destination selection effect as described above based on FIG. 69 (D) is performed (FIG. 80). (I)).

  If the first effect button 63a is not operated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period at the timing when the effective period ends. The same effect (operation-response effect as illustrated in FIG. 80 (H)) is performed.

[Comparison of countdown effects]
Next, referring to FIG. 81, a countdown effect of a rank-up effect (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)), a first countdown effect (see FIGS. 76 and 77), and a second countdown effect (FIG. 79, FIG. 80) will be described. Here, FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for describing features of various countdown effects.

  When the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect are compared, the following can be said. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, in the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, a number (countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the execution of the first great chance notice is displayed in the icon display area 9e. It is displayed in the area immediately above (see FIG. 74 (D)). On the other hand, in the first countdown effect, a number (first countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the execution of the first suggestion effect is displayed in the area immediately above the hold icon display area 9c ( FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, in the second countdown effect, a number (second countdown effect image) indicating the remaining time until the timing immediately before the execution of the second suggestion effect is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 79 ( B)). As described above, when the countdown effect of the rank-up effect, the first countdown effect, and the second countdown effect are compared, the display areas in which the respective countdown effect images are displayed are different from each other.

  The following can be said about the number of digits of the number indicated by the countdown effect image relating to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is a single-digit number (see FIGS. 74 (D) to (G)). On the other hand, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is a three- or four-digit number (see FIGS. 76 (C) and 77 (B)). On the other hand, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is a single-digit number like the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 79 (B)). . Thus, when comparing the numbers indicated by the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect, the numbers indicated by the countdown effect images related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the numbers indicated by the second countdown effect images related to the second countdown effect Are one-digit numbers, but only the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect has a different number of digits.

  In addition, the following can be said of the numeral colors of the numbers indicated by the countdown effect images related to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the numeral color of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is white (see FIG. 74 (D)). On the other hand, the numeral color of the number indicated by the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect is yellow or red (see FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, the numeral color of the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect image is the same red color as one of the numbers indicated by the first countdown effect image (see FIG. 79 (B)).

  The following can be said about the size of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to each countdown effect. That is, as exemplified in FIG. 81, the number (see FIG. 76B) indicated by the first countdown effect image is the smallest, and the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 74 (D ) Is medium, and the number (see FIG. 79 (B)) indicated by the second countdown effect image is the largest.

  The following can be said about the initial value of the number indicated by the countdown effect image relating to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the initial value of the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect is fixed to “5” (FIG. 79 (B), FIG. 80 (B)). ), FIG. 80 (E)). On the other hand, the initial value of the number indicated by the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect is variable (see FIGS. 76 (C) and 77 (B)). Also, the initial value of the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect is variable.

  The following can be said about the countdown speed of the number indicated by the countdown effect image relating to each countdown effect. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 81, the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect decreases by “1” per second, and the countdown speed is unchanged. Also, the number indicated by the first countdown effect image relating to the first countdown effect also decreases by “1” per second, and the countdown speed is unchanged. On the other hand, the number indicated by the second countdown effect image related to the second countdown effect may decrease by “1” in 1.3 seconds, or may decrease by “1” in 0.7 seconds, for example. Its countdown speed is variable.

  The following can be said about the stock function of stocking the countdown effects of each countdown effect. That is, the first countdown effect may be executed twice within the same fluctuation, or may be executed three times within the same fluctuation. In the first countdown effect, the execution of the first countdown effect is suspended and the second countdown effect is executed. There is a function to stock one countdown effect (see FIG. 76 (C)). On the other hand, the countdown effect of the rank-up effect and the second countdown effect do not have a function of holding the execution of the countdown effect and stocking the countdown effect.

(Effects of each countdown effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the three types of countdown effects are compared, each countdown effect image is displayed in a different display area, and when the countdown effect ends, different suggestions are provided. An effect may be performed. For this reason, as compared with the case where the display area of the countdown effect image is one or the case where only one type of effect is executed in response to the end of the countdown effect, the variation of the effect is more abundant, and as a result, It is possible to perform a high-quality production.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the display modes (for example, the display position, the number of digits, the number color, and the size of the numbers) of the countdown effect images related to the respective countdown effects are different from each other. The player can clearly identify these countdown effects even if any two of the countdown effects are executed simultaneously. For this reason, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the original effect cannot be obtained due to the player not being able to recognize that the two types of countdown effects are being executed simultaneously. .

  According to the present embodiment, the speed at which the number indicated by the countdown effect image related to the countdown effect of the rank-up effect (or the first countdown effect image related to the first countdown effect) is counted down, and the second countdown effect related to the second countdown effect The speed at which the number indicated by the 2 countdown effect image is counted down is different from each other. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the effect becomes monotonous due to the countdown effect being performed many times, and as a result, the interest of the effect is reduced.

[About production mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, an effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state will be described. Here, FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for describing the effect mode in the low-probability low base state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 82, a plurality of effect modes including a normal mode, a storm mode, a large storm mode, a rescue zone, and a large chance effect generation zone are provided as effect modes during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state. A production mode is provided. These effect modes are different from each other, for example, in the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a, the type of character displayed on the first display screen 7a, the variable effect sound output from the speaker 67, and the like.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, normally, the effect is executed in the normal mode during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol in the low-accuracy low-base state. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, as described above, the process of step S4505 in FIG. 52 for setting the variable effect pattern and the process of step S4506 in FIG. 52 for setting the notice effect pattern are performed. Then, based on the result of this first special symbol hit / fail determination and the results of these processes, whether or not to perform a mode transition effect of shifting the effect mode from the normal mode to another effect mode during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol And the effect mode to which the effect mode is shifted when performing the mode shift effect is also determined. Then, the effect mode during the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol is controlled based on the result of the determination regarding the effect mode.

  The normal mode, the storm mode, the great storm mode, the rescue zone, and the great chance effect generation zone have the following features. That is, the normal mode is a basic effect mode that is a basic effect mode and does not indicate that there is a possibility of a big hit. On the other hand, the storm mode is an effect mode that indicates that the possibility of executing the hit notification effect is higher than that of the normal mode by making the effect mode different from that of the normal mode. Is set to about 15%. This storm mode is an effect mode that shifts with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect as illustrated in FIG. 79 (E).

  FIG. 79 (E) illustrates an example in which the effect mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect performed at the end of the fluctuating effect of the first pseudo sequence. When the effect of the normal mode is executed until the end of the second variable production, and the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the storm mode with the execution of the pseudo continuous production performed at the end of the pseudo second variable production. There is also.

  Another feature is that the storm mode may be shifted to a large storm mode, which is a higher mode (of the storm mode), which has higher jackpot reliability than the storm mode. Specifically, for example, with the execution of the first pseudo continuous production (indicating the development to the second pseudo production) at the end of the fluctuating production of the first pseudo production, the production mode changes from the normal mode. The mode shifts to the storm mode, and the production mode is changed from the storm mode to the great storm with the execution of the second pseudo continuous production at the end of the fluctuating production of the second pseudo simulation (indicating the development to the third pseudo simulation). A transition pattern for transitioning to the mode is given as an example.

  The great storm mode is an effect mode that indicates that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the normal mode, and the hit reliability is set to about 50%. Like the storm mode, this great storm mode is an effect mode in which the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is a transition trigger, and in addition to the case of shifting from the storm mode, as described above, the normal mode is passed through the storm mode. There is also a transition pattern that shifts directly to the Oarashi mode without the need. Specifically, at the end of the fluctuating production of the first pseudo series, the production mode is changed from the normal mode to the Oomori mode with the execution of the first pseudo continuous production (indicating the development to the pseudo second series). The transition mode changes from the normal mode to the transition pattern in which the second pseudo continuous production is performed at the end of the fluctuating production of the second pseudo production (indicating the development to the third pseudo production). There is a transition pattern for transition to the Oomori mode.

  The rescue zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than in the normal mode, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 25%. In this rescue zone, a transition pattern for transitioning from the normal mode as the first pseudo continuous production is performed at the end of the fluctuating production of the first pseudo production (indicating the development to the second pseudo production), At the end of the fluctuating production of the second pseudo pseudo sequence (indicating the development to the third pseudo pseudo sequence), a transition pattern for transitioning from the normal mode as the second pseudo consecutive production is executed, during the first SP reach (or A transition pattern for transitioning from the normal mode when the special symbol corresponding to the rescue zone is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the second SP reach) is prepared.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol is displayed on the first display screen 7a during the great storm mode, and a transition pattern for shifting to the rescue zone triggered by the display of the special symbol is also prepared. I have. Note that this rescue zone does not have an effect mode that is a higher-level mode of the rescue zone, such as a large storm mode for the storm mode. Depending on the display mode of the effect image displayed on the third display screen 72a, the jackpot is determined. The feature is that the reliability changes. Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the rescue mode, a friendly character supporting the enemy character and the own character that battles is displayed on the third display screen 72a. If the background image of the friendly character is red, the jackpot reliability is determined. Is about 23%, and when the background image of the ally character is gold, the jackpot reliability is about 50%.

  For this reason, the player enjoys the rescue mode effect while paying attention to the background image of the friend character displayed on the third display screen 72a in addition to the effect of the rescue zone performed on the first display screen 7a. Is possible.

  The large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode that indicates that the possibility of executing the hit notification effect is higher than that of the normal mode, and the big hit reliability is set to about 48%. There is a characteristic that, when the player enters the great chance production generation zone, the system always develops into SPSP reach thereafter. In other words, there is a feature that the effect mode can be shifted to the large chance effect effect generation zone only when the variable effect pattern that develops from the other reach effects with relatively low jackpot reliability to the SPSP reach is set.

  In addition, the large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode in which a dedicated stage effect is executed in the large chance effect occurrence zone that can suggest that the above-described second large opportunity notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) is executed. There is a feature that, when the stage of the stage effect reaches the upper limit level MAX, the second great chance notice is executed (always) thereafter. Therefore, when the effect mode is shifted to the large chance occurrence zone, the player can enjoy the stage effect while expecting the stage of the stage effect to reach the level MAX. A specific example of this stage effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Also, in the large-chance effect production zone, the stage effect is terminated when the frame lamp 66 emits a golden light during the stage effect and a frame flash for outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 67 occurs. There is a characteristic that a second big chance notice is generated later (always).
That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stage shifts to the large chance effect generation zone, and when the second large opportunity effect is executed later, the stage effect that finally reaches the level MAX or the stage effect of Either of the effects in which a frame flash <gold> occurs on the way is executed.

  In addition, when the stage production of the large chance production generation zone is being performed, a five-digit number indicating the degree of accumulation of points is displayed, and the fifth and fourth digits of this number finally indicate the same number. In the case of, there is a characteristic that a hit notification effect is executed thereafter (always).

[Examples of production in the large chance production zone]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, a specific example of the production of the large chance production zone will be described. Here, FIGS. 83 and 84 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the effects related to the large chance effect generation zone.

  FIG. 83 (A) illustrates a state in which the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c has been shifted to the icon display area 9e as the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the icon has been started. Have been. When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbols, the same effect symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left and right columns, and reach is established (see FIG. 83 (B)). . After that, a first effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the first effect button 63a is performed (see FIG. 83 (C)). During the effective period of the first effect button operation promoting effect, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and an effective time indicating the remaining time of the effective period. The period gauge and the characters “press!” Indicating the content of the operation performed by the player on the first effect button 63a are displayed.

  On the other hand, when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect, the player is notified that the player enters the great chance effect occurrence zone as an operation corresponding to the operation. The character of “Large Chance Effect Occurrence Zone” is displayed large in the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (D)). Note that when the game enters the large chance effect generation zone, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, since the SPSP reach always develops, the effect icon constituting the hold icon and the hold icon display area 9c is displayed in the second position. 1 is deleted from the display screen 7a (see FIGS. 83 (C) and (D)).

  Next, an explanatory effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a in which an explanatory note "Aim at level MAX by pressing and holding the button!" Indicating the content of the mission to be performed by the player during the large chance effect producing zone is performed (FIG. 83 (E)). Then, the first long press effect in the large chance effect generation zone is performed (see FIG. 83 (F)). When the effective period of the first long press effect starts, the third display screen 72a displays a level 1 image indicating that the level of the own character is level 1 and a level 1 image indicating that the level of the own character is level 2. A level 2 image indicating that the level of the own character is level 3 and a level MAX image indicating that the level of the own character is level MAX are displayed. At the start, since the level of the own character is the initial level of Level 1, the Level 1 image is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F).

  During the effective period of the first long press effect, as illustrated in FIG. 83 (F), a first effect button image simulating the first effect button 63a and an effective time indicating the remaining time of the effective period. From the period gauge, the character “long press!” Indicating the content of the operation to be performed by the player on the first effect button 63a, and the five-digit number that increases according to the operation of the first effect button 63a The composed point image is displayed. Note that in FIG. 83 (F), during the valid period of the first long press effect, the player presses and holds the first effect button 63a, and points are made according to the number of enemy aircraft destroyed by the long press. The state where 138 points are accumulated is illustrated. In addition, in order to indicate that the game has shifted to the large chance effect generation zone, the text of “large chance effect generation zone” is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 83 (F)). ).

  It should be noted that the numerical values indicated by the point images, which are increased by a long press of the first effect button 63a by the player, and the level 1 image to the level MAX image have the following relationship. That is, when the number indicated by the point image is between “0” and “25000”, the level 1 image is highlighted, and when the number indicated by the point image is between “25001” and “50000”, the level 2 image is displayed. Is highlighted, and when the number indicated by the point image is between “50001” and “75000”, the level 3 image is highlighted and the number indicated by the point image is between “75001” and “99999” Sometimes there is a relationship that the level MAX image is highlighted.

  Next, when the effective period of the first long press effect ends, a result effect is provided to notify the result of the player's long press operation during this effective period (see FIG. 83 (G)). Specifically, as a result of the player pressing and holding the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the first long press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached “38000”, and this number is level 2 Since the value is between "25001" and "50000" corresponding to the character "", the character "Arrival at level 2!" Is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that the level 2 has been reached. It is displayed large (see FIG. 83 (G)).

  In this way, when the result effect for the first long press effect is performed, the second long press effect is performed (see FIG. 83 (H)). During the effective period of the second long press effect, an effect display common to that of the first long press effect is performed. Here, the first display during the effective period of the second long press effect is performed. The point at which the number indicated by the point image has reached “39138” by further pressing the effect button 63a, and the level of the own character is level 2 in response to the long press of the first effect button 63a for the first long press effect. 83, an effect display different from that during the effective period of the first long press effect is performed in that the level 2 image is highlighted instead of the level 1 image (FIG. 83 ( F) and (H)).

  Next, when the valid period of the second long press effect ends, a result effect is performed to notify the player of the result of the long press operation during the valid period (see FIG. 83 (I)). Specifically, as a result of the player pressing and holding the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the second long-press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached “64000” and this number is level 3 Since the value is between "50001" and "75000" corresponding to the above, the character "reached level 3!" Is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that level 3 has been reached. It is displayed large (see FIG. 83 (I)).

  In this way, when the result effect for the second long press effect is performed, the third long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84 (A)). During the effective period of the third long-press effect, an effect display common to the effective period of the second long-press effect is performed. Here, the first effect display during the effective period of the third long-press effect is performed. The point that the number indicated by the point image has reached “76328” by further pressing the effect button 63a, and the level of the own character is level 3 according to the long press of the first effect button 63a for the second long press effect. 83, an effect display different from that during the valid period of the second long press effect is performed in that the level 3 image is highlighted instead of the level 2 image (FIG. 83 ( H) and FIG. 84 (A)).

  Next, when the valid period of the third long press effect ends, a result effect of notifying the result of the player's long press operation during the valid period is performed (see FIG. 84 (B)). Specifically, as a result of the player pressing and holding the first effect button 63a during the valid period of the third long-press effect, the number indicated by the point image has reached “76328”, and this number is the level MAX. Since the value is between “75001” and “99999” corresponding to the above, the character “reached level MAX!” Is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a in order to notify that the level MAX has been reached. It is displayed large (see FIG. 84 (B)).

  In this manner, when the result effect for the third long press effect is performed, the fourth long press effect is performed (see FIG. 84 (C)). During the effective period of the fourth long-press effect, an effect display common to that during the valid period of the third long-press effect is performed. Here, the first display during the effective period of the fourth long-press effect is performed. The point indicated by the point image reaches “99641” by further pressing the effect button 63a, and the level of the own character is set to the level MAX in response to the long press of the first effect button 63a for the third long press effect. 84, an effect display different from that during the valid period of the third long press effect is performed in that the level MAX image is highlighted instead of the level 3 image (FIG. 84 ( A) and (C)).

  Next, when the valid period of the fourth long press effect ends, the fifth and fourth digits of the number indicated by the point image at this point indicate the same value (see FIG. 84 (C)). At the time, the jackpot is rich.

  In addition, during the valid period of the fourth long press effect, the level of the own character has reached the level MAX, and it is suggested that the second maximum chance notice is generated by the level MAX image being highlighted. Therefore, at the timing when the effective period of the fourth long press effect ends, the above-described extended gimmick effect is performed based on FIG. 69 (F) (see FIG. 84 (D)). Then, since the level of the own character has reached the level MAX, the second great chance notice described above based on FIG. 69 (G) is executed following the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 84 (E)). .

  Thereafter, at the beginning of the SPSP reach, a title is displayed to notify that the SPSP reach has been developed (see FIG. 84 (F)). When approaching the end of the SPSP reach, the cut-in shown in FIG. 84 (H) is generated. A first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 84 (G)) is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the effect of the large chance effect generation zone, a stage effect that can be developed stepwise up to any of four or less stages with four stages as an upper limit is executed. By executing the stage effect that develops to the four stages (the level of the own character reaches the level MAX), it is possible to foresee that the second great chance notice will be executed thereafter. In addition, when the second great opportunity notice is executed later, a stage effect that evolves to the upper limit of four stages and ends is executed. A stage effect that evolves to a stage less than and ends is executed.

  In addition, since the large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode in which the jackpot reliability is extremely high at about 48%, the player may assume that a stage effect that finally develops to less than four stages is performed. Also, it is possible to enjoy the game without lowering the expectation for the execution of the hit notification effect.

(Effects of the production of the large chance production zone)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large chance effect generation zone is an effect mode that suggests that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than in the normal mode. In some cases, it may be announced that the second great chance notice will be executed by the stage effect performed in the above. For this reason, by performing the production in the large chance production occurrence zone, it is possible to increase not only the player's expectation of the jackpot but also the expectation that the second great opportunity notice will be generated. As a result, it is possible to obtain a high production effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the stage effect that evolves to the fourth stage and ends in the large chance effect generation zone is executed, the second large opportunity notice is (always) executed. For this reason, the player who expects the second great chance notice to be executed can be expected to develop the stage production to the fourth stage, and the synergistic effect of the stage production and the second great opportunity notice Thereby, a high effect can be obtained.

[About group notice]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “group notice” as a possibility suggestion effect that indicates that there is a possibility that a jackpot game may be executed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low base state. There is a case where a notice effect called "preliminary effect" is executed. This group announcement is a movement effect in which a plurality of characters move on the first display screen 7a in a predetermined direction. Is done.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes, as the group notice, a first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which a large number of first characters move leftward on the first display screen 7a. A second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which two characters move rightward on the first display screen 7a can be executed.

<Specific example of the first group notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the first group notice will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 85 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the first group notice. FIG. 85 (A) shows a state in which the icon (green icon) whose display color is green is displayed in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a, and the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the green icon. The state immediately after the second pseudo continuous production (pre-reach pseudo continuous production) is executed during the display and the pseudo third production of the variable production is started is illustrated. As described above, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect of the third pseudo sequence, first, the left symbol (for example, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 85 (B)), and then left The same right symbol (for example, three symbols) as the symbol is pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 85 (C)).

  Then, immediately after the reach is established in this manner, the first group notice is performed (see FIGS. 85 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 85 (G) to (I)). Specifically, an effect display indicating that a large number of first characters appear from the right end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the left end is performed, and a first group announcement for effecting movement of the plurality of first characters. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 85 (D) to 85 (F), the icons targeted for the icon from the start to the end of the first group notice are displayed. When the change effect is not performed, as illustrated in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I), the icon change effect for the icon is performed between the start and the end of the first group notice. May be done. In other words, during the first-group notice, there are cases where the display mode of the icon does not change and cases where it changes.

<About icon change production>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment provides the game ball to the first starting port 20 in a situation where it is not possible to immediately start the special symbol hit / fail determination and the special symbol change display such as during the special symbol change display or the jackpot game. Is won, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is accepted is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment). When the right for the first special symbol hit determination is thus held, the same number of hold icons as the number of holds for the first special symbol hit determination are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Each screen diagram of FIG. 85 illustrates a state in which one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c to indicate that the number of holds in the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “1”. I have.

  By the way, the hold icon is usually displayed as a white and circular hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 85A). On the other hand, when a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, an icon change effect in which the display mode of the hold icon (for example, both or one or both of the color and the shape of the hold icon) changes is performed. May be done.

  FIG. 86 exemplifies the type of the reserved icon, the icon that can be the icon, the display mode of the icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. When an icon change effect targeting the hold icon is performed, for example, a white hold icon (white icon) is replaced with a blue hold icon (blue icon), a green hold icon (green icon), and a red hold icon ( (Red icon), a gold hold icon (gold icon), a rainbow hold icon (rainbow icon), and the like. In the present embodiment, the white icon does not indicate the jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability of the blue icon is set to about 1%, the jackpot reliability of the green icon is set to about 5%, and the jackpot of the red icon is set. The reliability is set to about 30%, the jackpot reliability of the gold icon is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the icon change effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed only once for one hold icon determined to execute the icon change effect. In some cases, an icon change effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, when one pending icon that is the target of the icon change effect is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, an icon change effect in which the hold icon changes from a white icon to a blue icon is performed. After that, an icon change effect may be performed a plurality of times on one hold icon, such as changing the hold icon from a blue icon to a red icon. In addition, when the hold icon starts to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon (for example, a blue icon) from the beginning, one or more icon change effects are performed on the hold icon that has started to be displayed as an icon other than the white icon. You may be asked.

  Further, when the hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e, the icon change effect in which the display mode of the icon changes is 1 or It may be performed multiple times. Here, when the pending icon and the icon are compared for the icon change effect, the two have the following coincidences and differences. That is, there is a coincidence that both the hold icon and the icon can be changed to the blue icon, the green icon, the red icon, the gold icon, and the rainbow icon illustrated in FIG. 86. On the other hand, the icon can change to a green flying icon, a red flying icon, a gold flying icon, and a rainbow flying icon illustrated in FIG. 86, whereas the hold icon changes to these flying icons. There is a difference between them in that they cannot be obtained.

  Here, the flight icon is an icon that imitates a vehicle that can fly, the green flight icon is a green icon that imitates a helicopter, the red flight icon is a red icon that imitates a propeller aircraft, and the gold flight icon is a large icon The rainbow icon is a golden icon imitating a passenger plane, and the rainbow icon is a rainbow icon imitating a spaceship. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the green flying icon is set to about 25%, the jackpot reliability of the red flying icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flying icon is set to about 78%. The jackpot reliability of the rainbow flying icon is set to 100%.

  As is clear from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the icon change effect for the icon, for example, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a white icon to a green icon, , An icon change effect in which the icon changes from a green icon to a rainbow icon, and an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a blue icon to a gold icon may be performed. In addition, the icon is displayed as an icon that is not a flying icon at the beginning when the icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. As an icon change effect targeting the icon, for example, the icon is changed from a green icon to a green icon. An icon change effect in which the icon changes to a green flight icon, an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a red icon to a red flight icon, and an icon change effect in which the icon changes from a red flight icon to a gold flight icon are performed.

  When the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, one or more icon change effects are performed on the hold icon, and the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e and becomes the icon. When one icon is displayed, the icon change effect is performed in both the reserved icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e. May be performed.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hit is reported in the SPSP reach (see FIG. 67 (N)) which is a highly reliable reach effect, the second effect button operation promoting effect is provided at the end of the SPSP reach. Is performed, and a hit notification effect (or a loss notification effect) is executed in accordance with the operation of the second effect button 63b for the second effect button operation promoting effect (see FIG. 70). Then, the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)), and the first SP reach (see FIG. 67 (I)), which are reach effects with lower reliability than the SPSP reach. , The second SP reach (see FIG. 67 (J)), when a hit is reported, a hit notification effect is executed irrespective of the operation of the second effect button 63b by the player. ing.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of performing the icon change effect targeting the icon, the icon is selected from a green flying icon, a red flying icon, a gold flying icon, and a rainbow flying icon. A further configuration is provided in which when the icon is changed to such a flight icon, a button image change effect (see FIGS. 89 and 90) in which the flight icon is changed to a second effect button image used for the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed. Has been adopted.

  For this reason, by changing the icon to any one of the four types of flying icons illustrated in FIG. 86 during the change display of the first special symbol, it eventually develops into SPSP reach and informs of the hit. It is possible for the player to recognize that the game is being performed, and it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the icon change effect of changing the hold icon to any of the four types of flight icons is performed, the reach effect is finally changed to the SPSP reach during the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Since the player can recognize the flow of the reach production such as development from a very early stage, there is a possibility that the interest of the reach production may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, a configuration is adopted in which the icon can be changed to a flying icon, while the holding icon cannot be changed to a flying icon. ing.

(About preliminary judgment processing)
Next, a description will be given of a preliminary determination process for realizing an icon change effect for an icon (a hold icon or the icon). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first special symbol award determination is suspended, prior to the first special symbol award determination being performed, it is determined in advance whether to execute the jackpot game. A determination process may be performed. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 20, and based on the special symbol hit / off judgment random number, A similar hit / fail judgment process is performed prior to the first special symbol hit / fail judgment process performed at the start of the change of the special symbol. It is determined in advance whether or not. Also, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the special symbol hit determination random number, it is determined in advance which variation pattern will be selected when the first special symbol hit determination is executed.

  As described above, when the pre-determination process is performed in response to the reservation of the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate, the game control microcomputer 81 transmits the special figure 1 start ball entry command including the pre-determination result. It is transmitted to the control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the above-described icon change effect based on the pre-determination result and the like included in the special figure 1 start ball entry command. I do. Then, when it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, it is determined in which change pattern the display mode of the icon (the hold icon or the icon) is changed, and the icon change effect based on the determination result is displayed on the image control board 100. To run.

(About the icon change production accompanying the first group notice)
When it is determined that the icon change effect is to be performed on the icon, a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon may be determined immediately after the reach is established. Specifically, for example, a change pattern for changing the green icon displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e to the gold icon immediately after the reach is established may be determined. On the other hand, when the notice effect pattern for performing the first group notice is set by the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 52) of step S4506 performed at the start of the change of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. There is.

  In this manner, the execution of the icon change effect of the change pattern in which the icon is changed from the green icon to the gold icon immediately after the reach is established is instructed, and the announcement in the announcement effect pattern of executing the first group announcement immediately after the reach is established When the variable effect start command instructing the execution of the effect is transmitted to the image control board 100, the icon is changed from the green icon to the gold icon during the period from the start of the first group notice immediately after the reach is established to the end. (See FIGS. 85 (G) to 85 (I)).

  On the other hand, the execution of the icon change effect of changing the icon from the green icon to another icon immediately after the reach is established is not instructed, and the first stage announcement is performed immediately after the reach is established. Is sent to the image control board 100 immediately after the reach is established, the first group notice is performed without the icon change effect of the icon (FIG. 85 (D)). To (F)).

  Although the case where the first group notice is performed immediately after the reach is established has been described above, the second group notice may be performed immediately after the reach is established.

<Specific example of the second group notice>
Hereinafter, a specific example of the second group notice will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 87 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the second group notice. In FIG. 87 (A), the above-described development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is performed with a red icon displayed as the icon in the icon display area 9e on the first display screen 7a. The situation is illustrated. When the development gimmick effect is performed, the background image of solid black is reached in order to make the player expect that the above-mentioned second great chance notice (see FIGS. 67 (M) and 69 (G)) will occur. A dark effect in which only the symbols (for example, the five symbols on the left and the five symbols on the right) and the corresponding icon are displayed and other effect images are not displayed is performed (see FIG. 87B).

  If this dark turn production is performed, a second great chance notice may be subsequently performed. However, if the second great chance notice is not performed, a battle with the enemy character in the SPSP reach will be performed following the dark turn production. A self-character appearance effect of performing an effect display indicating the appearance of the self-character to be performed is performed (see FIG. 87 (C)).

  Then, immediately after this self-character appearance effect is performed, a second group notice is performed (see FIGS. 87 (D) to (F) and FIGS. 87 (G) to (I)). Specifically, an effect display indicating that a large number of second characters appear from the left end of the first display screen 7a and run away to the right end is performed, and a second group announcement for effecting the movement of the plurality of second characters. Sound is output from the speaker 67.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 87 (D) to 87 (F), the icon for the icon is used during the period from the start of the second group notice to the end thereof. When the change effect is not performed, and as illustrated in FIGS. 87 (G) to 87 (I), the icon change effect for the icon is performed between the start and the end of the second group notice. May be done. In other words, during the second group notice, there are cases where the display mode of the icon does not change and cases where it changes. FIGS. 87 (G) to 87 (I) illustrate an example in which the icon changes from a red icon to a gold flying icon during the second group notice.

  As described above, the group announcement may be performed immediately before the SPSP reach is started, not only immediately after the reach is established. In addition, based on FIG. 87, a case has been described as an example where the second group notice is performed immediately before the SPSP reach is started. However, the first group notice may be performed immediately before the SPSP reach is started. Further, the group notice can be executed not only after the reach is established or immediately before the SPSP reach is started but also, for example, immediately before the first SP reach is started or immediately before the second SP reach is started. However, multiple group announcements are not made within the same fluctuation.

(Characteristics of group notice)
As is clear from the above description based on FIGS. 85 to 87, the effect control microcomputer 91 changes the display mode of the icon to the first display mode as the group notice is executed during the display of the icon. To the second display mode (indicating that the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed is higher than that of the first display mode).

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 85 (D) to (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the first group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 85 (G) to (I). During the first group notice, the icon has changed from a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to a gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%). In the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (D) to 87 (F), the display mode of the icon does not change during the second group notice, whereas in the examples shown in FIGS. 87 (G) to 87 (I). During the second group notice, the icon has changed from a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to a gold flying icon (big hit reliability: about 78%).

  As is apparent from the above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the icon changes from the first display mode to the second display mode in accordance with the first group notice (or the second group notice). The first case (see FIGS. 85 (G)-(I) and FIGS. 87 (G)-(I)) does not change and the second case (FIGS. 85 (D)-(F), FIG. 87 (D)) To (F)), the first case has a feature that the probability of executing the jackpot game is higher than that of the second case.

(Reliability of jackpot for group announcement)
Next, the jackpot reliability of the group announcement will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of each group notice. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to execute four types of group notices exemplified in FIG. Here, the first group notice is a first group notice (see FIG. 85) in which a large number of first characters appear, and the jackpot reliability is set to about 45%. The second group notice is a second group notice (see FIG. 87) in which a number of second characters (different from the first character) appear. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is the first group notice. It is set to about 45%, which is the same as the above.

  In the third group notice (third group notice), immediately after a large number of first characters move to the left, a special character (for example, own character) moves in the same direction so as to follow these first characters. This is a group notice in which a moving effect display is performed. That is, the first group announcement is a group announcement of an effect pattern in which the first character is included in the plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the third group announcement is the first announcement in the plurality of characters. They differ from each other in that they are a group announcement of an effect pattern that includes both the character and the own character. The jackpot reliability of the third-group notice is set to 100% in the present embodiment.

  In the fourth group notice (fourth group notice), immediately after a large number of second characters move rightward, a special character (for example, own character) moves in the same direction so as to follow these second characters. This is a group notice in which a moving effect display is performed. That is, the second group announcement is a group announcement of an effect pattern in which the second character is included in the plurality of characters but the own character is not included, whereas the fourth group announcement is the second announcement in the plurality of characters. They differ from each other in that they are a group announcement of an effect pattern that includes both the character and the own character. The jackpot reliability of the fourth-group notice is set to 100% in the present embodiment.

  As described above, the jackpot reliability of the first group notice and the second group notice is set to about 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the third group notice and the fourth group notice is set to 100%. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 is capable of executing four types of group notices of the first group notice to the fourth group notice. On the other hand, when it is determined by the game control microcomputer 81 that the jackpot game is not to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute the first group notice and the second group notice, but can execute the third group notice. It is impossible to execute the group notice and the fourth group notice.

  Such execution control of group notice can be realized by, for example, the following configuration. The ROM configuring the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a group announcement execution determination table for determining whether to execute the group announcement. In the group announcement execution determination table, a random number value is associated with each of the big hit and the loss, and a larger random number is associated with the big hit than with the loss. Further, the ROM constituting the effect control microcomputer 91 stores a hitting group notice selection table and a loss group notice selection table for selecting the type when it is determined to execute the group notice. In the winning group notice selection table, a random number is associated with each of the four types of group notices of the first to fourth group notices. On the other hand, in the loss group notice selection table, random numbers are not associated with the third group notice and the fourth group notice of the first group notice to the fourth group notice, and the first group notice and the second group notice are not associated with each other. A random value is associated with the group notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is a group announcement execution determination random number for determining whether or not to execute the group announcement while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is running, and a group announcement selection for selecting a type of the group announcement. A random number update process for updating various effect random numbers for determining an effect pattern such as a random number is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command related to the first special symbol right / wrong determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command from the main control board 80 with respect to the group announcement execution determination random number appropriately updated by the random number update process. Is obtained as a group preview execution decision random number. Similarly, with respect to the group announcement selection random number appropriately updated by the random number updating process, the count value at the time when the change start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired as the group announcement selection random number.

  Next, if the received fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is “big hit”, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the acquired group preview execution determination has been made. Whether or not to execute the group announcement is determined based on whether or not the random number matches any of the random numbers associated with the jackpot in the group announcement execution determination table. On the other hand, if the received fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the acquired group announcement execution determination random number is stored in the group announcement execution determination table. It is determined whether or not to execute the group announcement based on whether or not any of the random numbers associated with the loss match.

  If the received fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "big hit" and determines that the group notice is to be executed, The group announcement selection random number acquired when the fluctuation start command is received is compared with the random number value associated with any of the first to fourth group announcements defined in the winning group announcement selection table. Based on whether they match, any one of the first to fourth group notices is selected. On the other hand, if the received fluctuation start command includes information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing” and it is determined that the group notice is to be executed, the fluctuation start command is received. On the basis of which the group announcement selection random number acquired at this time matches the random number value associated with which of the first group announcement and the second group announcement specified in the group announcement selection table for losing, Select the first group notice or the second group notice.

  As is clear from the description so far, in the hit group notice selection table referred to when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “big hit”, the first group notice to the fourth group notice are selected. Since each is associated with a random number value, any of the first to fourth group notices can be executed. On the other hand, a random number value is associated with the first group notice and the second group notice in the loss group notice selection table which is referred to when the determination result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is “loss”. However, random numbers are not associated with the third-group notice and the fourth-group notice. For this reason, if the result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is “losing”, the first group notice or the second group notice can be executed, while the third group notice and the fourth group notice can be executed. Execution of the notice is limited.

  As described above, the third group notice and the fourth group notice can be selected when the determination result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination this time is “big hit”, while they are selected when the result is “losing”. Since the third group notice or the fourth group notice appears, the jackpot becomes rich.

(Effects by group notice)
According to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect of changing the display mode of the icon from the first display mode to the second display mode may be executed as the group notice is executed. . For this reason, by the synergistic effect of the group notice and the icon change effect targeting the icon, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed, and as a result, High performance effects can be obtained.

  When the first group notice is executed (for example, see FIG. 85), during the first group notice, the icon is changed from the green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) to the gold icon (big hit reliability: about 75%). , The jackpot game is more easily executed than when the icon does not change from the green icon during the first group notice. When the second group notice is executed (for example, see FIG. 87), during the second group notice, the icon changes from the red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) to the gold flying icon (big hit reliability: about 78%). ), The jackpot game is more easily executed than when the icon does not change from the red icon during the second group notice. As described above, when the display mode of the icon changes with the group notice, the jackpot game is more easily executed than when the icon does not change, and the player pays attention to the icon by executing the group notice. Since it is possible to perform the icon change effect on the icon irrespective of the group notice, a higher effect can be obtained.

  Also, the first group notice and the second group notice can be executed regardless of the result of the first special symbol decision judgment, whereas the third group notice and the fourth group notice are the first special sign decision. It can be executed only when the result of the determination is a jackpot. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect that the third-group notice and the fourth-group notice are executed more than the first-group notice and the second-group notice. Compared to the case where only the group notice is prepared, it is possible to execute the group notice with a wider variety of effects and higher interest.

(Modified example regarding group notice)
The following configuration may be adopted for the group notice.
That is, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the group notice can be executed at various timings after the reach is established during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state, but in other embodiments, A configuration may be adopted in which a group notice can be executed before the reach is established during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the display mode of the icon is changed from the start of the group notice to the end thereof. For example, the display mode of the icon is changed immediately before the group notice is started. Change, change the display mode of the icon at the same time as the start of the group notice, change the display mode of the icon at the same time as the end of the group notice, or change the display mode of the icon immediately after the end of the group notice Or you may be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the icon can be changed to a flying icon, while the holding icon cannot be changed to a flying icon.However, in other embodiments, the holding icon is changed to a flying icon. A configuration capable of executing an icon change effect to be changed may be adopted.

  Also, here, the case where the possibility suggestion effect is a group announcement has been described as an example, but the possibility suggestion effect is other than the group announcement if the effect suggests that the jackpot game may be executed. The production of may be. That is, the possibility suggestion effect may be, for example, a first great chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) or a second great chance notice (see FIG. 69 (G)). In this case, it is conceivable to additionally adopt a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during the first large opportunity notice or the display mode of the icon is changed during the second large opportunity notice. . The possibility suggestion effect may be SPSP reach, which is a reach effect with high reliability. In this case, a configuration in which the display mode of the icon is changed during SPSP reach may be adopted. Also, the possibility suggestion effect may be a pseudo-sequence effect (see FIG. 79 (E)) suggesting a shift to the storm mode. Good. Also, the possibility suggestion effect may be a notification effect (see FIG. 83 (D)) for notifying entry into the large chance effect occurrence zone, and the display mode of the icon may be changed during the notification effect. Good.

[About button image change effect]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment develops into SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach production, and, when approaching the end of SPSP reach, the first production button operation promotion production (FIG. 69 (I ) Is performed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a during the effective period of the first effect button operation promoting effect, a cut-in (see FIGS. 70A to 70C) occurs. Then, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIGS. 70 (D) to (F)) is performed thereafter, and the player presses the second effect button 63b during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect. When operated, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed.

  As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 69 (H) to (I) and the notation in FIG. 70, when the start timing of the second effect button operation promotion effect is reached while the icon other than the flying icon is displayed. In the state where the icon is displayed, an operation promotion image related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a irrespective of the icon. Specifically, the operation promotion image here is a second effect button image imitating the second effect button 63b, a character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b of "press!", The remaining time of the effective period. Is a validity period gauge.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the icon has changed to the flying icon before the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach is started, the icon is changed to the flying icon. There is a feature that a button image change effect is performed in which the button image change effect is changed from the icon display area 9e to an operation promoting image that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b (see FIGS. 89 and 90).

<First specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 89 is a screen diagram showing a first specific example of the button image change effect. FIG. 89 (A) shows a title display suggesting that the player's own character will develop into an SPSP reach (C battle) that battles with the enemy character C with the gold flying icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. This is illustrated as an example. When the end of the SPSP reach is started after the SPSP reach is started in this way, the first effect button operation promoting effect described above is performed (see FIG. 89 (B)). Specifically, in a state where the gold flying icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a and the remaining of the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 63a is valid A validity gauge indicating time is displayed.

  When the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period, or at the time when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a, Cut-in occurs (see FIG. 89 (C)). FIG. 89 (C) illustrates an example in which gold cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. And the cut-in generated in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect have the following relationship.

  That is, if the icon has changed to the red flying icon or the gold flying icon before the SPSP reach is developed, the red cut-in is performed according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promoting effect. Alternatively, there is a relationship that a gold cut-in occurs and a green cut-in does not occur. As described above with reference to FIG. 86, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the red flying icon is set to about 55%, and the jackpot reliability of the gold flying icon is set to about 78%. On the other hand, the jackpot reliability of the green cut-in is set to about 7% (see FIG. 71), and if the green cut-in is generated while the red flying icon or the gold flying icon is displayed, Not only will the player's expectation of the jackpot be significantly lowered, but also the effect of displaying a red flying icon or a gold flying icon as the icon may be significantly reduced. And these may also lead to a decrease in the player's willingness to operate the second effect button 63b for the second effect button operation promotion effect performed after the cut-in. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the icon has changed to the red flying icon or the gold flying icon before the SPSP reach development, the first rendering button 63a is operated in response to the first rendering button operation promotion rendering. The above-described configuration of generating a cut-in higher than red (not generating a green cut-in) is adopted.

  On the other hand, if the icon has changed to a rainbow flying icon (with a jackpot reliability of 100%) before the SPSP reach is developed, the jackpot becomes rich when the rainbow flying icon is displayed. A green cut-in, a red cut-in, or a gold cut-in is generated according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the button operation promoting effect.

  When the SPSP reach is developed in a state where the icon different from the flight icon is displayed, a red cut-in or a gold cut-in is generated according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. If it occurs, then there is a relationship that the icon changes to a flying icon that is equal to or greater than the red flying icon. That is, as the icon, for example, a green icon (big hit reliability: about 5%) or a red icon (big hit reliability: about 30%) is displayed, and a red cut-in (big hit reliability: about 56%) or the like is displayed. When a gold cut-in (big hit reliability: about 81%) occurs, after the cut-in occurs, an icon change effect in which the icon changes to a flying icon other than the green flying icon is performed. This will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 89, if a gold cut-in (or red cut-in) occurs while the gold flying icon is displayed as the icon, prior to the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 89 (H)). , A button image change effect is performed (see FIGS. 89 (D) to (H)). Specifically, an effect that represents that the gold flying icon moves rightward from the icon display area 9e, turns in the sky, and moves to the center of the first display screen 7a. The display is performed (see FIGS. 89 (D) to (F)). Then, when the gold flying icon moves to the center of the first display screen 7a, an effect display (deformation action) indicating that the gold flying icon is split into two and deformed into a second effect button image is performed. Note that, here, the button image change effect in which the gold flying icon changes to the second effect button image has been described as an example. However, as the icon, a green flying icon, a red flying icon, or a rainbow flying icon is displayed. Also, a similar button image change effect is performed.

  By the way, when the button image change effect of moving the flying icon from the icon display area 9e is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is hidden, and as a result, the button image change effect is performed. After that, there is a possibility that a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the display color of the icon may occur. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the following configuration is employed to prevent this problem from occurring.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the flying icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second effect button operation promoting effect, the operation promoting image related to the second effect button operation promoting effect. Are displayed in the same color as the flight icon, and the second effect button image that constitutes the character and the character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b of “press!” Are adopted. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 89, if the gold flying icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e prior to the second rendering button operation promotion rendering, the gold flying icon is completed when the gold flying icon deformation action is completed. Is displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)).

  If the color of the validity period gauge related to the second effect button operation promotion effect is changed according to the color of the flying icon, the visibility of the validity period gauge decreases in relation to the display color of the background image. As a result, there is a possibility that the player cannot accurately grasp the remaining time of the validity period. For this reason, in the present embodiment, while the second effect button image and the characters indicating the operation content are displayed in the same color as the flying icon, the validity gauge displays a predetermined color (for example, white) regardless of the display color of the flying icon. And display it.

  As described above, the operation promotion image related to the second production button operation promotion production is displayed (see FIG. 89 (H)), and if the second production button 63b is operated within the valid period, the hit notification production is performed. (Refer to FIG. 89 (FIG. 89 (I).) Specifically, a hit notification effect in which the three effect symbols forming the zoro eyes are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped, or three effect symbols forming the reach-losing eyes Is falsely stopped and then a final stop is performed.

<Second specific example of button image change effect>
FIG. 90 is a screen diagram showing a second specific example of the button image change effect. In FIG. 89, the case where the flying icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e before the SPSP reach development has been described as an example. Now, a description will be given of a button image change effect performed when the SPSP reach is developed.

  In FIG. 90 (A), a title display indicating that the player's own character will develop into an SPSP reach (B battle) that battles with the enemy character B is displayed with the red icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. Is illustrated. When approaching the end stage after the SPSP reach is started in this way, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 89 (B) (see FIG. 90 (B)). ).

  When the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, at the timing when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period, or at the time when the effective period ends without operating the first effect button 63a, Cut-in occurs (see FIG. 90C). FIG. 90C illustrates an example in which red cut-in is performed using the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment develops into SPSP reach with the icon different from the flying icon being displayed, and the first effect button 63a for the first effect button operation promotion effect. When a red cut-in or a gold cut-in occurs in response to the operation, the icon is subsequently changed to a flying icon that is equal to or greater than the red flying icon. Therefore, when a red cut-in (or a gold cut-in) occurs in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a, immediately after that, an icon change effect of changing the icon from a non-flying icon to a flying icon is performed. . Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 90 (D) to 90 (E), a lightning strike directly hits the red icon as the icon, and the energy changes the icon from the red icon to the red flying icon. An icon change effect representing a changing state is performed.

  Note that FIGS. 90 (D) to 90 (E) illustrate an example in which the icon changes from a red icon to a (higher jackpot reliability) red flying icon. In some cases, the icon changes, or the icon changes from a red icon to a rainbow flying icon. When a green icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a green flying icon, a red flying icon, a gold flying icon, or a rainbow flying icon, which is a flying icon having higher jackpot reliability than the green icon. When a gold icon is displayed as the icon, the icon changes to a gold flying icon or a rainbow flying icon, which is a flying icon having higher jackpot reliability than the gold icon.

  As described above, the icon that is not the flight icon changes to one of the plurality of flight icons having higher jackpot reliability than the icon.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 90, when the icon changes from the red icon to the red flying icon, a button image change effect is performed using the red flying icon (see FIGS. 90 (F) to (I)). This button image change effect is the same effect as the button image change effect described above with reference to FIGS. 89 (D) to (H). Specifically, the red flying icon moves rightward from the icon display area 9e. Then, an effect display showing a state of turning in the sky and moving the red flying icon to the center of the first display screen 7a is performed (see FIGS. 90 (F) to (H)). And, although not shown in FIG. 90, when the red flying icon moves to the center of the first display screen 7a, an effect display showing a state where the red flying icon is broken into two and transformed into a second effect button image. (Deformation action) is performed.

  As described above, when the button image change effect of changing the red flying icon to the operation promoting image related to the second effect button operation promoting effect is performed, the red second effect button image and “Press! Is displayed (see FIG. 90 (I)). Then, when the second effect button 63b is operated within the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, a hit information effect or a reach loss effect in which the three effect symbols forming the double eyes are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped. A loss notification effect in which three effect symbols forming eyes are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped is performed.

(Effect of button image change effect)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a button image change effect in which the icon changes to an operation promotion image may be executed. For this reason, the icon has both the function of suggesting that the first special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and the function of changing to the operation promotion image, thereby effectively increasing the amusement of the effect using the icon. It is possible to improve.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while it is possible to execute the button image change effect during the SPSP reach, a low short reach such as a normal short reach, a normal long reach, a first SP reach, and a second SP reach performed before the SPSP reach is developed. The feature is that the button image change effect is not executed during the reach effect of the reliability. For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation of developing into SPSP reach, as compared to the case where the button image change effect is not executed during SPSP reach.

  Before the SPSP reach is developed, both the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first display screen 7a, as illustrated in FIG. 68, for example. On the other hand, during the SPSP reach, the icon is displayed on the first display screen 7a without displaying the hold icon (for example, see FIGS. 89 and 90), and the icon is displayed in the operation promotion image. A changing button image change effect is performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the hold icon compared to the case where the hold icon is displayed during the SPSP reach. It is possible to easily suppress the problem of overlooking the image change effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the second effect button operation promotion effect is performed after the button image change effect is performed, the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e before the button image change effect is performed. Is displayed on the first display screen 7a in a size that suggests the jackpot reliability (see FIGS. 71, 89 (H) and 90 (I)). For this reason, the player can grasp the degree of the jackpot reliability based on the size of the second effect button image, and based on the display color of the second effect button image, a button image change effect. It is possible to grasp the display color of the icon (flying icon) before the operation is performed.

(Modified example of button image change effect)
The following configuration may be adopted for the button image change effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, in response to the operation of the second effect button 63b during the display of the operation-promoting image (second effect button image) in which the icon has changed, a hit notification effect is performed as an operation-responsive effect. Although the case has been described, in another embodiment, for example, a cut-in may be performed as the operation corresponding effect.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the icon is changed to the second effect button image as the operation promotion image has been described. However, in other embodiments, the icon is changed to the first effect button image and the first effect button image is changed. The operation corresponding effect may be performed in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a during the display of the effect button image.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is employed in which a button image change effect is not executed during a reach effect other than the SPSP reach. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a configuration in which the button image change effect can be executed during a reach effect other than the SPSP reach, such as the first SP reach or the second SP reach, may be adopted.

[About special reach production]
Although not shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there may be a case where the normal long reach develops into a special reach effect, or a case where the game develops into a SPSP reach and develops into a special reach effect. . The special reach effect (see FIGS. 91 to 93) is a reach effect in which the player operates the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b. During the special reach effect, four effective periods for allowing the player to operate the first effect button 63a and one effective period for allowing the player to operate the second effect button 63b are set. Then, the display mode of the possibility suggestion image indicating that the jackpot game may be executed is updated every time the first effect button 63a is operated in each of the above four valid periods, and The jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display mode of the sex suggestion image, and thereafter, in response to the operation of the second effect button 63b during the one valid period, a hit information effect or a loss information effect is performed. Is

<Specific examples of special reach production>
Hereinafter, specific examples of the special reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 91 to 93 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the special reach effect. FIG. 91A illustrates an example in which the above-described normal long reach is performed with a red icon displayed as the icon (based on FIG. 69B and the like). Here, when the fluctuation effect pattern that evolves from the normal ring reach to the special reach effect is set at the time of starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the following effect is performed.

  That is, first, in order to pretend that the loss notification effect is performed in the normal long reach, a similar loss effect is performed in which three effect symbols forming reach reach eyes such as “565” are pseudo-stop-displayed (FIG. 91 (B)). )reference). Then, an effect image including the three effect symbols forming the reach-losing eyes is reduced and displayed, and an advanced effect of rotating the effect image clockwise is performed (see FIGS. 91 (C) to (D)). The development production includes a success production that succeeds in developing the special reach production and a failure production that fails to develop the special reach production.

  Although not shown in the figure, if a variable effect pattern is set in which a failed effect is performed at the end of the normal long reach and then a loss notification effect is set, the reduced image does not rotate clockwise and the original image does not rotate clockwise. , A failure effect is performed in which the size of the three effect symbols included in the reduced image is also returned to the original size, and these three effect symbols are completely stopped as they are.

  On the other hand, when a variable effect pattern that evolves from a normal long reach to a special reach effect via a successful effect is set, a state in which the reduced image is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 degrees) is displayed. Successful production is performed. When this successful effect is performed, a title display related to the special reach effect such as “chance of increasing reliability” is performed (see FIG. 91 (E)). Then, following this title display, an explanatory effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a, which displays a message describing the content of the operation to be performed by the player, such as "Press the button to increase the reliability!" (F)). As is clear from the notations in FIGS. 91 to 93, during the special reach effect, the effect display related to the special reach effect is performed without displaying the reach symbol.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the explanation effect is performed, a first operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (G)). This first operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and the first display screen 7a includes a first effect button imitation of the first effect button 63a. An effect button image and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the first validity period are displayed. In the special reach effect, the player performs five operations in total, such as causing the player to operate the first effect button 63a four times and then operating the second effect button 63b once. It is a production to be performed, and since the operation has not yet been performed even once, when the first operation promotion production is being performed, until the first operation is performed during the special reach production, The characters "5 more times" are displayed on the third display screen 72a.

  In the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player during the special reach effect, such as “5 more times”, is displayed on the third display screen 72a. May be displayed on the second display screen 71a, or may be displayed on both the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a.

  Next, when the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period of the first operation promotion effect, the first reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 91 (H)). In the first reliability increase effect, a reliability character as a possibility suggestion image such as "00%" is displayed at the center of the first display screen 7a, and the character uses the light gun to apply energy to the reliability character. An effect display is performed to show a state of injecting and increasing the numerical value indicated by the reliability character. FIG. 91 (H) shows an example in which one's own character independently injects energy into a reliability character in the first reliability increase effect. In some cases, energy is injected into the character. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 91 (H), since the reliability character indicates an extremely low numerical value such as “00%”, the reliability character is displayed in blue.

  As described above, when the first reliability increase effect is performed, a first result display effect is performed as a result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (I)). FIG. 91 (I) illustrates an example in which a reliability character of “06%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is displayed. Since it is still extremely low, a blue reliability character is displayed as in the case where the first reliability increase effect is performed.

  FIG. 91 (I) illustrates an example in which the result display effect indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 6% is being performed. However, the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is as follows. It is variable, and the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases only up to 3% according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promotion effect, or the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 8 % In some cases.

  In addition, there is a correlation between the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character and the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, and the more characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, the more the reliability character There is a relationship that the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by tends to be large.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the first result display effect is performed, a second operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92A). This second operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and, like the first operation promotion effect, the first effect button image and the validity period. The gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, in response to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the first operation promoting effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 6%. Blue reliability characters indicating the characters “06%” are also displayed. Also, here, since one operation has already been performed for a total of five operations, the character "remaining four times" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed in the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period of the second operation promotion effect, a second reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (B)). In the second reliability increase effect, first, a reliability character indicating a character of "06%" is displayed at the center of the first display screen 7a, and the self-character and the first ally character are displayed on the reliability character. An effect display indicating a state in which the numerical value indicated by the reliability character is increased in cooperation is performed.

  As described above, when the second reliability increase effect is performed, a second result display effect is performed as a result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (C)). FIG. 92 (C) illustrates an example in which a reliability character of “19%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 19% is displayed. Since it is still low, the reliability character indicating the character of "19%" is displayed in blue.

  In the first reliability increase effect (see FIG. 91 (H)), only the character itself appeared, so the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increased by only 6%. In the second reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (B)), since two characters of the own character and the first ally character appear, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 13% ( = 19% -6%). As described above, as the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect increases, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases more. It is possible to enjoy special reach production while expecting a character to appear.

  Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second result display effect was performed, a third operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (D)). This third operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and is the same as the first and second operation promotion effects. And the validity period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the second operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 19%. The blue reliability character indicating the character “19%” is also displayed. Also, here, since two operations have already been performed for a total of five operations, the character of “3 more times” indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed in the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period of the third operation promotion effect, a third reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (E)). In the third reliability increase effect, first, a reliability character indicating a character of "19%" is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a, and the reliability character indicates the reliability character alone in the reliability character. An effect display showing how to increase the numerical value is performed.

  As described above, when the third reliability increase effect is performed, a third result display effect is performed as a result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (F)). FIG. 92 (F) illustrates an example in which a reliability character of “27%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 27% is displayed. Since it indicates medium, the reliability character indicating the character of “27%” is displayed in green.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the third result display effect is performed, a fourth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (G)). This fourth operation promotion effect is a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a, and is similar to the first to third operation promotion effects. And the validity period gauge is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, according to the operation of the first effect button 63a for the third operation promotion effect, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character has increased to 27%, so during the fourth operation promotion effect, " The green reliability character indicating the character "27%" is also displayed. Also, here, since three operations have already been performed for a total of five operations, the character "2 more times" indicating the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is displayed in the third display. It is displayed on the screen 72a.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the valid period of the fourth operation promotion effect, a fourth reliability increase effect is performed (see FIG. 92 (H)). In the fourth reliability increase effect, first, a reliability character indicating a character of "27%" is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a, and the self-character and the first ally are displayed with respect to the reliability character. An effect display is shown in which three characters, a character and a second ally character, cooperate to increase the numerical value indicated by the reliability character.

  As described above, when the fourth reliability increase effect is performed, a fourth result display effect is performed as a result effect of the reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (I)). FIG. 92 (I) illustrates an example in which the reliability character of “52%” indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% is displayed. Since it is relatively high, the reliability character indicating the character of “52%” is displayed in red.

  In the fourth reliability increase effect (see FIG. 92 (H)), since three characters have appeared, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 25% (= 52% -27%). It is rising. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a reliability character (possibility image) indicating that there is a possibility that the jackpot game is executed is displayed, and the first effect is provided. In response to the operation of the button 63a, an effect display for changing the possibility suggestion image is performed so that the possibility of a jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases.

  Subsequently, when the fourth result display effect is performed, the reliability character displayed at the center of the first display screen 7a during the result display effect is enlarged and displayed (see FIG. 93A). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot reliability has increased to 52% by the four operations of the first effect button 63a, and the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is 2 Since the value is a relatively high value indicating that a big hit is made once a time, the player's expectation of the big hit can be effectively improved. It is possible to give the player a strong motivation for operating 63b.

  When the reliability character is displayed in an enlarged manner, an explanatory effect is displayed on the first display screen 7a in which a message describing the operation to be performed by the player, such as "press the lever to catch the big hit!" 93 (B)). Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses after the explanation effect is performed, a fifth operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 93 (C)). This fifth operation promotion effect is a second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b. An effect button image, characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 63b of “press!”, And an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the fifth effective period are displayed. In addition, here, since four operations have already been performed for a total of five operations, the character “Last” indicating that the remaining number of operations to be performed by the player is one. Is displayed on the third display screen 72a.

  Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination performed at the start of the change of the first special symbol this time is “big hit”, the second effect is performed during the effective period of the fifth operation promotion effect. In response to the operation of the button 63b, a hit notification effect is performed in which three effect symbols forming a zigzag pattern such as "555" are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped (FIGS. 93 (D) to (F)). reference). On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination performed at the start of the change of the first special symbol this time is “losing”, the second effect button is pressed during the effective period of the fifth operation promotion effect. In response to the operation of the button 63b, a loss notification effect is performed in which three effect symbols forming reach reach eyes such as "565" are pseudo-stopped and then permanently stopped (see FIGS. 93 (G) to (I)). ).

(About the jackpot reliability of reliability characters)
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot reliability of the special reach effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a is blue is approximately 15%. Is set. The jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is green is set to about 35%, and the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is red is about 35%. Is set to The jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is gold is set to about 75%, and the jackpot reliability when the display color of the final reliability character is rainbow is 100%. Is set to

  As is clear from this description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a case where the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color of the reliability character finally becomes blue, and a case where the reliability character is changed. There is a case where the reliability character changes in a change pattern in which the display color finally becomes gold, and in the latter case, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot game will be executed than in the former case. .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is notified by the display color of the final reliability character, so that the player can intuitively determine the degree of the jackpot reliability. It is possible to recognize.

(Effects by special reach production)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reliability character changes in accordance with the operation of the first effect button 63a such that the possibility of the jackpot suggested by the reliability character increases, so that the jackpot game Can be made to feel as if the player is increasing the possibility that the first effect is executed, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect using the first effect button 63a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the possibility of executing the big hit game differs depending on the change pattern of the reliability character. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the reliability character changes, and it is possible to execute a more effective effect of changing the reliability character.

  In the present embodiment, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the second effect button 63b after changing the reliability character. Therefore, the player can operate the second effect button 63b while observing the possibility of executing the big hit game by looking at the changed reliability character.

(Modification of special reach production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the special reach effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of intermittent valid periods are provided, and the possibility of the jackpot indicated by the reliability character increases according to the operation of the same number of the first effect buttons 63a as the valid periods. The case where the reliability character is changed in such a manner has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, only one validity period for allowing the player to operate the first effect button 63a is provided, and in accordance with the long press operation of the first effect button 63a during this effective period, the reliability is increased. The degree character may be changed continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the jackpot reliability is suggested by the display color of the final reliability character has been described, but in other embodiments, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the number indicated by the final reliability character. You may make it. In this case, for example, if the number indicated by the final reliability character becomes “77” or “100”, the second effect button 63b is operated in response to the fifth operation promotion effect, so that It is conceivable to employ a configuration in which a hit notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the final display color of the reliability character displayed in response to the fourth operation of the first effect button 63a, and the operation of the second effect button 63b immediately thereafter is suggested. The case where the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed according to the above has been described. In contrast, in another embodiment, instead of performing the second effect button operation promoting effect (see FIG. 93 (C)) immediately after the final reliability character is displayed, the final reliability character is displayed. After being displayed, for example, a configuration that evolves into one of the first to fourth reach effects may be adopted. In this case, for example, when the number indicated by the final reliability character becomes a predetermined number (for example, 70), the fourth reach has the highest jackpot reliability among the four types of reach effects. It is conceivable to employ the configuration in combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where the larger the number of characters appearing in the reliability increase effect, the larger the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character is likely to be. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a plurality of movable roles such as a first stage production, a second stage production, and a third stage production are provided, and the first stage production during the reliability increase stage. When the second stage actor operates, the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character increases more than when the object operates, and the third stage effect is activated when the second stage actor operates during the reliability increase stage. It is conceivable to adopt another configuration in which the action of the accessory increases the increase in the jackpot reliability indicated by the reliability character.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the reliability character is displayed as the possibility suggestion image indicating that the big hit game may be executed has been described, but the possibility suggestion image is limited to the reliability character. Instead, for example, a gauge image in which the number of lighting locations increases in accordance with the operation (continuous hit or long press) of the first effect button 63a in one effective period may be used.

  Heretofore, a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b, and performs the first effect button operation promoting effect and the second effect button operation promoting effect during the special reach effect. explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, only the first effect button 63a of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b is provided, and the second effect button operation promoting effect described in the present embodiment is provided by the first effect button 63a. You may replace it with a production button operation promotion production.

[Luminescence production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95 to FIG. 97, a description will be given of a light emission effect performed using the speaker lamp 671, the first starting port lamp 201, and the like. Here, FIG. 95 (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 for describing the speaker lamp 671, and FIG. 95 (B) is a gaming board 2 for describing the first starting port lamp 201. FIG. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram for describing features of the light emission effect. FIG. 97 is a time chart illustrating a specific example of the effect control relating to the light emitting effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 95 (A), the speaker 67 has a built-in speaker lamp 671 having a plurality of color LEDs with respect to a translucent decorative member provided on a peripheral portion thereof. I have. FIG. 95A illustrates an example in which the speaker lamp 671 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). The speaker lamp 671 performs various effects by light by changing the lighting or blinking pattern of each color LED or changing the emission color of each color LED.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 95 (B), a first starting port lamp 201 as a board lamp is provided immediately below the first starting port 20 in the game board 2. The first starting port lamp 201 is configured to include a plurality of color LEDs, and is built in a translucent decorative member provided immediately below the first starting port 20. The first starting port lamp 201 performs various effects by light by changing the lighting or blinking pattern of each color LED or changing the emission color of each color LED.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the low-accuracy low-base state and the gaming ball has won the first starting port 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Before the 1 special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, a light emission effect using the speaker lamp 671 or the first start-up lamp 201 may be performed. This luminous production is performed when a game ball wins in the first opening 20 and the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is accepted is held during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the low-probability low-base state, and the winning timing is determined. This is a so-called pending look-ahead effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a light emission effect, a light emission effect of a blue blinking pattern in which the speaker lamp 671 blinks blue is performed (see FIGS. 96 and 97 (A)), and the speaker lamp 671 blinks green. 96 and 97 (B), and a red flashing pattern in which the speaker lamp 671 flashes red (FIGS. 96 and 97 (C)). See).

(Characteristics of the flashing blue light pattern)
In the light emitting effect of the blue blinking pattern, the jackpot reliability is set to about 7% (see FIG. 96). It is started (see FIG. 97A). For this reason, the player sees that the speaker lamp 671 is blinking in blue, and it is relatively unlikely that the “big hit” is notified in response to the execution of the reserved first special symbol right / wrong determination. It is possible to easily recognize that it is low.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the speaker lamp 671 is provided at a position away from the first display screen 7a. Therefore, for example, when the player is watching the first display screen 7a, there is a possibility that the speaker lamp 671 may not notice that the blue color has begun to blink. The same applies to the case where the speaker lamp 671 blinks green and the case where the speaker lamp 671 blinks red. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the timing when the speaker lamp 671 starts blinking, a corresponding winning sound corresponding to the blinking color is output from the speaker 67 for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). That is, when the speaker lamp 671 blinks blue, a blue corresponding winning sound (blue corresponding sound) corresponding to blue is output from the speaker 67. Thereby, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to the vicinity of the speaker 67, and there is an advantage that the player can easily notice that the light emission effect has started.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 97 (A), as the suspension of the first special symbol hit / fail determination, which has triggered the execution of the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern, is exhausted, the first look-ahead target in the figure is consumed. During the special symbol fluctuation display, if the reach effect develops from the pre-reach effect to the normal long reach via the normal short reach, the normal long reach will be activated before the flashing pattern with the blue flashing pattern is started. Until the start, normal BGM is output from the speaker 67. Then, when the normal long reach is started, the effect sound output from the speaker 67 is switched from the normal BGM to the normal long reach effect sound (NL reach effect sound) related to the normal long reach.

  As described above, in the case where the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is likely to be performed, the player is focused on the reach effect (here, normal long reach) performed on the first display screen 7a. It is preferred that For this reason, in this embodiment, when the reach effect develops from the normal short reach to the normal long reach during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to be prefetched, at the timing of developing into the normal long reach, The blue blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is terminated. The same applies to the case where the speaker lamp 671 is blinking red (or blinking green) before developing into normal long reach (see FIG. 97 (C)).

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 96, when the light-emitting effect is performed, the first start-up lamp 201 blinks white in synchronization with the blinking of the speaker lamp 671 regardless of the light emission color of the speaker lamp 671. I do. The first start-up lamp 201 is an icon (a white icon that is a normal icon) of a color indicating the jackpot reliability as the icon displayed on the icon display area 9e (related to the change display of the first special symbol). (See FIG. 86) is displayed in the same color as the icon. For this reason, for example, when the white icon as the icon changes to a blue icon, the first start lamp 201 blinks blue, and when the blue icon as the icon changes to a red icon, the first start lamp 201 changes to the first icon. The blinking blue light of the starting port lamp 201 changes to a blinking red light. When the red icon as the icon changes to the gold flying icon, the red blinking of the first start port lamp 201 changes to golden blinking. Then, during a button image change effect in which one of the flight icons (for example, the gold flight icon) illustrated in FIG. 86 moves from the icon display area 9e and changes to the second effect button image, Flashes in the same color as the flight icon.

  For this reason, the player can easily change the display color of the icon based on the emission color (blinking color) of the first start lamp 201 even during the period when the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 9e. It is possible to recognize.

  On the other hand, when a white icon is displayed as the icon, it is not necessary to blink the first starting lamp 201 in the same color as the icon, and the first starting lamp 201 may have another role. preferable. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the icon changes from a white icon to a colored icon (such as a blue icon) during execution of the light-emitting effect, the icon is changed until the icon changes to a colored icon. While the first start-up lamp 201 keeps blinking white, if the icon does not change to a colored icon during the execution of the light-emitting effect, the first start-up opening is performed until the light-emitting effect (blinking of the speaker lamp 671) ends. The white blinking of the lamp 201 is continued.

  As is clear from the comparison of FIGS. 97 (A) to (C), when the light-emitting effect of the green blinking pattern or the light-emitting effect of red blinking is executed, the speaker 67 is activated at the timing when the light-emitting effect is started. When the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is executed while the BGM output from the speaker changes, since the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the speaker 67 outputs the light emission effect at the timing when the light emission effect is started. There is a feature that the output BGM does not change.

  In addition, in the case where the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is executed, it is relatively unlikely that the jackpot is notified during the variable display of the symbol to be pre-read, and the jackpot such as the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach. The feature is that it is difficult to develop a reach production with relatively high reliability.

(Characteristics of flashing green pattern)
The lighting effect of the green blinking pattern has the jackpot reliability set to about 23% (see FIG. 96), and the green blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is almost simultaneous with the game ball winning in the first starting port 20. It is started (see FIG. 97B). For this reason, the player sees that the speaker lamp 671 is blinking green, and it is relatively unlikely that a “big hit” will be notified in response to execution of the held first special symbol hit / fail judgment. It is possible to easily recognize that the cost is high.

  In the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, at the timing when the speaker lamp 671 starts blinking green, a green corresponding winning sound (green corresponding sound) corresponding to green is output from the speaker 67 for a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds). You. The green corresponding prize sound is an effect sound that has a higher volume than the blue corresponding prize sound and is easier for the player to recognize than the blue corresponding prize sound. Further, when the light-emitting effect of the green blinking pattern is executed, similarly to the light-emitting effect of the blue blinking pattern, the first starting port is synchronized with the blinking of the speaker lamp 671 (here, the green blinking). The lamp 201 blinks in white. When the icon changes from a white icon to a colored icon during the execution of the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, the white blinking of the first starter lamp 201 continues until the icon changes to a colored icon. If the icon does not change to a colored icon during the execution of the flashing pattern light emission effect, the icon is continued until the green flashing pattern light emission effect ends.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability of the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is relatively high at about 23%, and with the suspension of the first special symbol right / wrong determination which triggered the execution of the light emission effect of the green blink pattern, A high-reliability reach effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability is easily executed (see FIG. 97B). For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 97 (B), the normal BGM output from the speaker 67 changes to the first light emission effect corresponding to the green light blinking pattern at the timing when the light emission effect of the green light blink pattern starts. Change to special BGM. Then, during the variation display of the first special symbol to be prefetched in the figure, when the development from the pre-reach effect to the development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) triggers the SPSP reach A battle, it is output from the speaker 67. The first special BGM, which has been performed, changes to a corresponding production sound (corresponding to the development gimmick production) with the start of the development gimmick production, and A battle production sound (corresponding to the A battle) with the start of the A battle. Further changes to

  By the way, when the development gimmick effect is performed, it is preferable that the player pays attention to the first display screen 7a because there is a possibility that the second great chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)) may be performed thereafter. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the development gimmick effect is performed from the pre-reach effect (without passing through the normal short reach, etc.) during the variable display of the first special symbol to be prefetched, At the timing when the gimmick effect is started, the green blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is ended. The same applies to a case where the speaker lamp 671 is blinking red (or blinking blue) before the start of the development gimmick effect.

  Also, in the case where the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is executed, it is relatively likely that the jackpot is notified during the fluctuation display of the prefetch target symbol, and two times during the fluctuation display of the prefetch target symbol. There is a feature that a pseudo-sequence effect is performed and it is easy to develop into a pseudo-sequence. However, even if the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is executed, if the pattern does not develop to the third pseudo sequence during the fluctuation display of the symbol to be pre-read (if the pseudo consecutive effect is not performed once, There is a case where it is performed only once). In this case, within the same fluctuation, it eventually develops into a SPSP reach effect or a special reach effect (see FIGS. 91 to 94).

(Characteristics of the flashing red light effect)
The lighting effect of the red blinking pattern has the jackpot reliability set at about 70% (see FIG. 96), and the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is almost simultaneously performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 20. It is started (see FIG. 97 (C)). For this reason, the player sees the speaker lamp 671 blinking in red, and is very likely to be notified of the “big hit” in response to the execution of the held first special symbol hit / fail judgment. It is possible to easily recognize that it is expensive.

  Further, in the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern, at the timing when the speaker lamp 671 starts blinking in red, a red corresponding winning sound (red corresponding sound) corresponding to red is output from the speaker 67 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The red corresponding prize sound has a higher volume than the blue corresponding prize sound and the green corresponding prize sound, and is an effect sound more easily recognized by the player than the blue corresponding prize sound and the green corresponding prize sound. In addition, when the light-emitting effect of the red blinking pattern is executed, similarly to the case where the light-emitting effect of the blue blinking pattern and the light-emitting effect of the green blinking pattern are executed, the first lamp is synchronized with the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671. The starting port lamp 201 flashes white. When the icon changes from a white icon to a colored icon during execution of the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern, the white blinking of the first starter lamp 201 continues until the icon changes to a colored icon. If the icon does not change to a colored icon during execution of the flashing pattern light emission effect, the icon is continued until the red flashing pattern light emission effect ends.

  Note that the jackpot reliability of the red flashing pattern light emission effect is extremely high at about 70%, and with the suspension of the first special symbol right / wrong determination which triggered the execution of the red flashing pattern light emission effect, SPSP It will develop into the most reliable X-battle in the reach. In other words, the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is characterized in that it is not executed when the pattern of the prefetch target does not develop into the X battle during the variable display.

  As described above, when the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is executed, the battle becomes a highly reliable X battle, and therefore, as illustrated in FIG. The BGM changes to the second special BGM corresponding to the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern at the timing when the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is started. Then, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to be prefetched in the figure, the normal short reach (see FIG. 67 (F)), the normal long reach (see FIG. 67 (H)) and the first SP reach from the pre-reach effect. (See FIG. 67 (I)), when the X battle of SPSP reach is developed, the second special BGM output from the speaker 67 is accompanied by the start of the normal long reach sound (NL). (Reach effect sound), changes to the first SP reach effect sound with the start of the first SP reach, and further changes to the X battle effect sound (corresponding to the X battle) with the start of the X battle.

  In addition, in the case where the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is executed, the possibility that the jackpot is notified is relatively high, and the battle progresses to the X battle during the variable display of the symbol to be prefetched. Therefore, the frame lamp 66 (see FIG. 95 (A)) flashes in red with the start of the light emission effect of the red flashing pattern.

  As is clear from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal short reach, the normal long reach that can be performed after the normal short reach, the normal short reach or the normal long reach can be performed after the normal long reach. The first SP reach, the second SP reach that can be performed after the normal short reach, and the SPSP reach that can be performed after these four types of reach effects can be executed, and the SPSP reach is displayed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When one X battle is executed, the speaker lamp 671 blinks in red (an example of a specific color) corresponding to the X battle before the change display of the first special symbol starts, and the speaker 67 outputs a winning sound corresponding to red.

(About the process for realizing the lighting effect)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following processing is performed to realize the above three types of light emission effects. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball is awarded at the first starting port 20 while the first special symbol is displayed in a low-probability and low-basis state, the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is accepted is reserved. . As described above, when the right of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is reserved, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the above-described preliminary determination processing. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 20, and based on the special symbol hit / off judgment random number, A similar hit / fail judgment process is performed prior to the first special symbol hit / fail judgment process performed at the start of the special symbol change display, and a "big hit" is determined when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment process is executed. Is determined in advance. Also, when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number of the change pattern acquired together with the random number for the special symbol hit / fail judgment, which fluctuation pattern is selected (as the change pattern of the first special symbol). Is determined in advance.

  As described above, when the game control microcomputer 81 performs the pre-determination process in response to the reservation of the right of the first special symbol determination, the preliminary determination result (the determination result of the first special symbol determination is determined) A special figure 1 starting ball entry command including information indicating whether or not it is a “big hit” and information indicating a change pattern of a special symbol is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern based on the pre-determination result and the like included in the special figure 1 start entering command. decide.

  Here, first, details of the process of setting a variable effect pattern in the variable effect start process (see FIG. 52) performed when the variable display of the first special symbol is started will be described. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the change start command from the main control unit 80, in step S4504 of FIG. 52, the change effect corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern designation command included in the change start command. The pattern determination table is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  For example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds, the variation patterns of the effect symbols are different from each other, but the variation pattern is developed to the pseudo third series. From normal short reach and normal long reach to the SPSP reach X battle, the random battles are different for each of a plurality of variable effect patterns common in that the X battle is notified of the hit. The associated 120 second variation effect pattern determination table is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM. Further, for example, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 60 seconds, the variation patterns of the effect symbols are different from each other, and the variation pattern is developed to the second pseudo sequence. Then, a different random value is associated with each of a plurality of variable effect patterns that are common in that they evolve into a first SP reach via a normal short reach and report a hit at the first SP reach. The variable effect pattern determination table for 60 seconds is read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM.

  Then, in step S4505, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads the variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable effect determination random number acquired in the process of step S4501 from the variable effect pattern determination table set in the RAM, thereby obtaining one variation. Select a production pattern.

  As described above, when the first special symbol change display is started, the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous production, the number of times of the pseudo continuous production when the pseudo continuous production is executed, and the reach when the reach production is executed are performed. A variable effect pattern is selected using a variable effect pattern determination table in which a variable effect pattern common to the type and flow of the effect is specified. Therefore, if the variation pattern to be designated by the variation pattern designation command can be specified in advance, before the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the X battle is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. Can be determined.

  Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing to determine whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern. That is, when the special effect control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start entering ball command transmitted from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the following based on the preliminary determination result included in the special figure 1 starting entering ball command. A variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in response to the held first special symbol right / wrong determination is specified. Then, with reference to the fluctuation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specified fluctuation pattern, when a fluctuation effect pattern is selected based on the fluctuation effect pattern determination table, it is determined whether or not the X battle of the SPSP reach effect is performed. judge.

  While the pachinko gaming machine 1 is running, the effect control microcomputer 91 generates a light emission effect for determining whether or not to execute a light emission effect, in addition to the above-described group announcement execution determination random number and group announcement selection random number. A random number update process for updating various effect random numbers such as an execution determination random number is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start entering ball command relating to the first special symbol hit / fail determination, the main control board 80 determines the light emission effect execution determination random number appropriately updated by the random number updating process. The count value at the time when the start ball entry command is received is obtained as a light emission effect execution determination random number.

  Here, the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is a reserved look-ahead effect that suggests that it will develop into an X battle of SPSP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 96 and FIG. 97 (C). Therefore, as described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the X battle is not to be performed based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the preliminary determination process and the fluctuation effect pattern selection table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Is determined not to execute the red-light flashing pattern light emission effect. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the X battle is to be performed, the light emission effect execution determination random number acquired when the special figure 1 start ball entry command is received is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 90. It is determined whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern based on whether or not it matches any of the random numbers. Specifically, when the obtained light emission effect execution determination random number matches any one of the random number values, it is determined that the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is to be executed, and the obtained light emission effect execution determination random number is equal to any of the random number values. When they do not match, it is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern.

  If the effect control microcomputer 91 determines to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern to the lamp control board 107 and the sound control board 106. On the other hand, the lamp control board 107 synchronizes the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671, the white blinking of the first starter lamp 201, and the red blinking of the frame lamp 66, and the voice control board 106 The prize sound corresponding to red is output, and the normal BGM output from the speaker 67 is changed to the second special BGM (corresponding to the flashing effect of the red blinking pattern).

  On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines not to execute the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern, it determines whether to execute the light emission effect of the green blink pattern. Here, as shown in FIG. 96 and FIG. 97 (B), the light-emitting effect of the green blinking pattern suggests that the light-emitting effect develops to the third pseudo-sequence, or the SPSP reach without developing to the third pseudo-sequence. Or a look-ahead production that suggests developing into a special reach production. For this reason, as described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the variation of the first special symbol to be pre-read based on the variation pattern identified by the preliminary determination process and the variation effect pattern selection table corresponding to the variation pattern. During the display, it is determined whether two pseudo consecutive effects are performed and the pseudo third effect is developed, or whether the SPSP reach or the special reach effect is developed without developing the third pseudo sequence.

  Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that it does not evolve to the third pseudo-sequence, nor does it evolve to the SPSP reach or the special reach effect without evolving to the third pseudo-sequence. Is determined not to perform the light emission effect. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that it will be developed into the pseudo third unit or from the pseudo first unit (or pseudo second unit) to SPSP reach or special reach effect, the special figure 1 Based on whether or not the light emission effect execution determination random number obtained when the start ball input command is received matches any one of the random number values stored in the ROM of the effect control board 90, the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is performed. Decide whether to execute. Specifically, when the obtained light emission effect execution determination random number matches any random number value, it is determined that the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern is to be executed, and the obtained light emission effect execution determination random number is equal to any random number value. If they do not match, it is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern.

  When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines to execute the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the light emission effect of the green light blinking pattern to the lamp control board 107 and the sound control board 106. On the other hand, the lamp control board 107 synchronizes the green blinking of the speaker lamp 671 with the white blinking of the first starting port lamp 201, and the voice control board 106 causes the speaker 67 to output a green corresponding prize sound. Then, the normal BGM output from the speaker 67 is changed to the first special BGM (corresponding to the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern).

  If the effect control microcomputer 91 determines not to execute the light emission effect of the green blinking pattern, it determines whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern. As is clear from the notation of FIG. 96 and FIG. 97 (A), the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is a reserved look-ahead effect that does not suggest any effect performed during the variable display of the first special symbol to be pre-read. . For this reason, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the light emission effect execution determination random number acquired when the special figure 1 start ball entry command is received matches any one of the random number values stored in the ROM of the effect control board 90. It is determined whether or not to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern based on whether or not the light emission effect is performed. Specifically, when the obtained light emission effect execution determination random number matches any random number value, it is determined that the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern is to be executed, and the obtained light emission effect execution determination random number is equal to any random number value. When they do not match, it is determined not to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern.

  When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines to execute the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern to the lamp control board 107 and the voice control board 106. On the other hand, the lamp control board 107 synchronizes the blue blinking of the speaker lamp 671 with the white blinking of the first starting port lamp 201, and the voice control board 106 causes the speaker 67 to output a winning sound corresponding to blue.

  As is apparent from the notation in FIG. 96, in the light emission effect of the blue blinking pattern, two effect changes of output of the winning sound corresponding to blue and blinking of the white of the first starter lamp 201 are combined, and light emission of the green blinking pattern is performed. In the effect, the three effect changes of the output of the winning sound for green, the white blinking of the first starting opening lamp 201, and the change of the BGM are combined. In the light emitting effect of the red blinking pattern, the output of the winning sound for red, the first starting opening. There is a characteristic in that the effect of light emission with higher jackpot reliability increases in the light emission effect, such as the combination of four effect changes such as white blinking of the lamp 201, BGM change, and red blinking of the frame lamp 66. . For this reason, the player can intuitively recognize the jackpot reliability based on the degree of the effect change combined in the light emission effect.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the own character wins the enemy character X in the X battle and is notified of the jackpot, the 4R becomes the first jackpot (see FIG. 6), and after the jackpot game ends. The high-accuracy low-base state is an advantageous state for a player who frequently expects to obtain many prize balls, in which small hits frequently occur until the next big hit. For this reason, by executing a light emission effect of a red blinking pattern suggesting execution of an X battle that can be a trigger for shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state, the player's expectation for shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state is effected. It is possible to improve it.

(Effects of light emission effects)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) may emit red light (an example of a specific color) in some cases, and the player executes the X battle of the SPSP reach. Can be recognized in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the X battle will be executed before the X battle is started, and the X battle and the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) emit red light. A high effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect with the effect to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) may emit red light before the change display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) in which the X battle is executed is started. For this reason, the speaker lamp 671 (and the frame lamp 66) emits red light (an example of a specific color) between the time when the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) change display is started and the X battle is started. As compared with the case, the player can recognize that the X battle is executed at an earlier stage, and can obtain a higher effect.

  In the present embodiment, since the speaker lamp 671 emits red light and the speaker 67 outputs a red corresponding winning sound, the player overlooks that the speaker lamp 671 emits red light. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress a problem that the player cannot recognize in advance that the X battle will be executed.

(Modifications related to lighting effects)
The following configuration may be adopted for the light emission effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671 is started before the variable display of the first special symbol to be pre-read is started (before the determination of the first special symbol that is held is executed). Although the case has been described, in another embodiment, the red blinking of the speaker lamp 671 may be started after the variable display of the first special symbol to be prefetched is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern is executed only when the X battle is executed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol to be pre-read, but in other embodiments, In addition to the X battle, when any of the SPSP reach is executed, a light emission effect of a red blinking pattern may be executed.

  Further, the light emission pattern and the light emission color of the speaker lamp 671 related to each light emission effect are not limited to those exemplified in the present embodiment, but may be other light emission patterns and light emission colors. For example, regarding the light emission effect of the red blinking pattern, the speaker lamp 671 may emit light in a light emission pattern in which the speaker lamp 671 alternately emits red light and white light, or the speaker lamp 671 may emit red light continuously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the light emitting means (the speaker lamp 671 in the present embodiment) is disposed in close proximity to the speaker 67 for outputting the effect sound will be described. It may be arranged at a remote position.

[About Mini Character Battle Direction]
Next, a mini-character battle effect performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram illustrating icons that can be obtained in the mini-character battle effect. FIG. 99 to FIG. 101 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the mini-character battle effect.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility that a jackpot game is executed, an icon change effect (see FIG. 87 and the like) and a pseudo continuous effect (for example, FIG. 68), a development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) that triggers the development of the SPSP reach, a second great chance notice (see FIG. 67 (M)), and an X battle (see FIG. 77 (G)). Is On the other hand, in the mini character battle effect, the mini self character, which is a small self character, and the mini enemy character, which is a small enemy character, battle on the first display screen 7a, and the mini self character defeats the mini enemy character In this case, the miniature character acquires an icon for notifying that the suggested effect is to be executed, and displays the icon on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 99 to 101).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 98, as the icons that the mini-owner character can acquire in the mini-character battle effect, a hold change icon, a NEXT icon, a development gimmick effect icon, a second great chance A preview icon and an X battle icon are provided. Here, the hold change icon is a hold icon or an icon notifying that the icon change effect for the icon is to be executed. The NEXT icon is an icon for announcing that the pseudo continuous production will be performed. The advanced gimmick effect icon is an icon that gives notice that the advanced gimmick effect will be executed. The second great chance notice icon is an icon for giving notice that the second great chance notice will be executed. The X battle icon is an icon for notifying that the X battle will be executed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a period in which “target fluctuation”, which is a fluctuation display of the first special symbol to be pre-read, is performed, and a fluctuation display of the first special symbol performed before the target fluctuation. A mini-character battle effect is performed using the “variation before subject”. Specifically, the first battle between the mini own character and the mini enemy character is performed in the pre-change before the target change, and the first battle between the mini own character and the mini enemy character is performed in the change in the target. I do. Specifically, it is as follows.

  FIG. 99 (A) shows a state in which one holding icon related to the first special symbol hit determination is displayed in the holding icon display area 9c, and the effect symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e ( And a first special symbol). As described above, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 in a state where the variation display of the effect symbol is performed, based on the special symbol success / failure determination random number, the variation pattern random number, and the like acquired according to the winning. , The pre-determination process described above is performed. Then, whether or not to execute the above-described icon change effect is determined based on a result of the preliminary determination that is a result of the preliminary determination processing.

  FIG. 99 (B) illustrates a state in which it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, and a red icon (see FIG. 86) is newly displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c as the second reserved icon. . In addition, although details will be described later, when the pre-determination process is performed as described above, it is also determined whether to perform the mini character battle effect based on the pre-determination result, and when the mini character battle effect is performed. If determined, the following effects will be performed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 99 (A) and (B), a hold icon (here, a red icon) indicating that the right of the first special symbol right / wrong judgment to be prefetched has been held is displayed in the hold icon display area. At approximately the same time as being displayed in 9c, the effect symbol display area 7b (an example of the first display area: see FIG. 3) in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed is narrower than the effect symbol display area 7b. It is changed to the effect symbol display area 7c (an example of the second display area: see FIG. 99 (B)). In other words, the display control is switched from the first display control in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b to the second display control in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in the effect symbol display area 7c. Thereby, each effect symbol constituting the three symbol columns displayed on the first display screen 7a is reduced and displayed. Then, for example, above the effect symbol display area 7c, a mini character battle effect image display area 7d for displaying a mini self character, a mini enemy character, and the like used in the mini character battle effect (an example of the third display area: FIG. 99 (B) )) Is secured. FIG. 99 (B) illustrates an example in which the mini-character and the mini-enemy character are displayed in the mini-character battle effect image display area 7d almost at the same time when the mini-character battle effect image display area 7d is secured. .

  Next, a second holding icon (here, a red icon: hereinafter also referred to as a “prefetching target icon”) corresponding to the first special symbol determination as a prefetching target is performed at a newly displayed timing. When a predetermined time elapses after the change display of the 1 special symbol and the effect symbol is started, for example, the left 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped and the right 8 symbols are pseudo-stop (see FIG. 99 (C)). In the state where the left 5 symbols and the right 8 symbols are pseudo stopped, the middle 3 symbols are pseudo stopped, and as the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol elapses, these three effect symbols are finally stopped. (See FIG. 99D). The icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is deleted from the icon display area 9e immediately before the three effect symbols stop.

  Subsequently, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol and the three effect symbols are completely stopped, the first special symbol hit / fail determination corresponding to the first hold icon is executed. Then, a shift process is performed on each hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e as the corresponding icon, and is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. The pre-reading target icon (red icon) is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the first hold icon. Then, at the same time as the first special symbol variation display is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the effect symbol variation display in the effect symbol display area 7c is started (FIG. 99 ( D) and (E)). That is, in a state where the display area in which the effect symbols are displayed is changed from the effect symbol display area 7b to the effect symbol display area 7c (a state in which the effect symbols are reduced), the variation display of the effect symbols is started. You.

  As described above, when the pre-target fluctuation immediately before the target fluctuation starts, the first battle between the mini-owner character and the mini-enemy character starts (see FIG. 99 (E)). FIG. 99 (E) illustrates an example in which the mini self-character attacks a dinosaur-type mini enemy character with a light gun. When the attack of the mini-owner character hits the mini-enemy character, a predetermined effect display indicating the state is performed (see FIG. 99 (F)). When the mini-owner character wins, the lost mini-enemy character is deleted from the mini-character battle effect image display area 7d, and the item is displayed at the position where the mini-enemy character was displayed (see FIG. 99 (G)). FIG. 99 (G) illustrates an example in which two NEXT icons are displayed to notify that two pseudo consecutive effects are to be executed in the subject change.

  Although FIG. 99 (G) illustrates an example in which two NEXT icons are obtained, an icon different from the NEXT icon may be obtained in some cases. Further, the number of icons obtained in one battle is not limited to two, and there may be a case where one icon is obtained or a case where three or more icons are obtained. Also, in the first battle, the mini-own character may be attacked by the mini-enemy character, and as a result, the icon may not be acquired.

  Next, when two NEXT icons are displayed instead of the mini enemy characters, these NEXT icons move to the right area on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 99 (G) and (H)). At this time, a state in which the mini-owner character is delighted to win is displayed. The display of each icon in the right area is continued until the corresponding suggestion effect is executed.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the start of the pre-target change immediately before the target change, in the effect symbol display area 7c, for example, the left two symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 99 (G)), and then the right six symbols are displayed. The symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 99 (H)). Then, during the period in which the scroll display of the middle symbol row is performed, the next (monster type) mini enemy character in which the mini self character fights in the second battle is newly displayed in the mini character battle effect image display area 7d. (See FIG. 99 (I)).

  Note that, here, a case will be described in which, at the end of the pre-target change immediately before the target change, a mini-enemy character that fights with the mini self-character in the second battle is displayed, but after the target change starts, In the second battle, a mini enemy character fighting the mini self character may be displayed.

  Subsequently, when the left two symbols are pseudo-stopped and the right six symbols are pseudo-stopped, the middle four symbols are pseudo-stopped, and as the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol elapses, these three effects are produced. The symbol is completely stopped (see FIG. 100A). The icon displayed in the icon display area 9e is deleted from the icon display area 9e immediately before the three effect symbols stop.

  With respect to the pre-target fluctuation just before the target fluctuation, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the first special symbol and the three effect symbols are completely stopped, the first special symbol corresponding to the prefetch target icon is displayed. A special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, and a shift process is performed on the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. Specifically, the prefetch target icon (here, the red icon) displayed in the reserved icon display area 9c is shifted as the icon to the icon display area 9e (see FIGS. 100A and 100B). Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol hit / fail determination of the prefetch target, and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area 7c is started ( (See FIGS. 100A and 100B).

  Thus, when the target variation starts, the second battle between the mini-owner character and the mini-enemy character starts (see FIG. 100 (C)). FIG. 100 (C) illustrates an example in which the mini self-character attacks the (second) mini enemy character with a light gun. When the attack of the mini-owner character hits the mini-enemy character, a predetermined effect display indicating the state is performed (see FIG. 100 (D)). Then, when the mini-owner character wins, the lost mini-enemy character is deleted from the mini-character battle effect image display area 7d, and the item is displayed at the position where the mini-enemy character was displayed (see FIG. 100 (E)). FIG. 100 (E) illustrates an example in which a second great chance notice icon (see FIG. 98) including the character “HIGH ATSU” for notifying that the second great chance notice is executed in the subject change is displayed. Have been.

  FIG. 100 (E) illustrates an example in which the second great chance notice icon is acquired. In some cases, it can be obtained. Further, the number of icons obtained in two battles is not limited to one, and two or more icons may be obtained. In the second battle, the mini-owner character may be attacked by the mini-enemy character, and as a result, the icon may not be acquired.

  Next, when the second great chance notice icon is displayed instead of the mini enemy character, the second great chance notice icon moves to the right area on the first display screen 7a (FIGS. 100 (E) and (F)). )reference). Since the two NEXT icons acquired in the first battle are displayed in the right area, the second great chance notice icon is displayed above these icons. In this way, when the movement display of the icon acquired in the second battle is performed, the mini-character battle production ends, and the mini-character battle that appears in the mini-character battle production leaves the first display screen 7a. An end effect relating to the effect is performed (see FIG. 100 (F)).

  As described above, when the end effect relating to the mini-character battle effect is performed, the first display control for variably displaying the effect symbols in the effect symbol display region 7b from the second display control for variably displaying the effect symbols in the effect symbol display region 7c. The display control is switched to (see FIGS. 100 (F) and (G)). Thereby, each effect symbol constituting the three symbol columns displayed on the first display screen 7a is displayed in the original size. Note that the icons displayed in the right area on the first display screen 7a continue to be displayed at the same position even after the mini-character battle effect ends (see FIGS. 100 (F) and (G)).

  When the mini-character battle effect ends while the target is being changed, first, the left six symbols are pseudo-stopped in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 100 (G)), and then the right four symbols are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 100 (H)). )reference). Then, although not shown in the figure, the sliding of these six left symbols and four right symbols occurs, and scroll display of the left and right symbol columns is resumed. In this way, when the scroll display of the left and right columns of the symbol columns is restarted, the pseudo continuous effect is executed immediately thereafter (FIGS. 100 (I) and 101 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 100 (I), an effect representing a state in which the left six symbols, the middle seven symbols (pseudo continuous symbols), and the right four symbols slowly move toward the active line. Display is performed. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 101 (A), almost simultaneously with these three effect symbols pseudo-stopping on the activated line, the two NEXT icons displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a are displayed. One of them moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a, and its NEXT icon is displayed in a superimposed manner on the middle seven symbols.

  As described above, when the first pseudo continuous production is performed in a form accompanied with the release of the first NEXT icon stocked in the mini-character battle production, the pseudo second consecutive production is started (FIG. 101). (B)). When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the pseudo second series, for example, the left six symbols and the right six symbols are pseudo stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 101 (C)). Immediately after that, the middle seven symbols are pseudo-stopped during the reach symbol (here, six symbols) (see FIG. 101 (D)). At this time, as illustrated in FIG. 101 (D), the second NEXT icon left in the right area of the first display screen 7a moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a, and The NEXT icon is superimposed on the middle 7 symbols.

  Then, when the second pseudo consecutive production is executed in a form involving the release of the second NEXT icon stocked in the mini-character battle production, the pseudo third consecutive fluctuation production is started (FIG. 101 (E)). )reference). Here, the case where the pre-reach pseudo-run and the post-reach pseudo-sequence are performed once for each of the two NEXT icons has been described as an example. A pseudo run may be performed after two reach.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the pseudo third series, for example, the reach symbols (here, 6 symbols) are displayed in the upper left area and the upper right area on the first display screen 7a. In the pseudo stop state, an extended gimmick effect is executed (see FIG. 101 (F)). FIG. 101 (F) illustrates a state in which the above-described development gimmick effect (see FIG. 67 (L)) is being performed in a state where a red icon as a prefetch target icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. ing. When this extended gimmick effect is performed, a dark turn effect (see FIG. 87 (B)) is performed to expect the player to generate a second great chance notice (see FIG. 101 (G)).

  When the blackout effect is performed, there are cases where the second great chance notice is given and cases where the second great chance notice is not given. Since the second large chance notice icon is displayed), the second large chance notice is always executed following the darkening effect. Specifically, the second large chance notice icon displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a moves to the central area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 101 (H)), and the second moved chance icon is displayed. When the large chance notice icon is displayed in the central area for a predetermined time (for example, one second), the above-mentioned second large chance notice is executed based on FIG. 67 (M) and FIG. 69 (G) (FIG. 101 ( I)).

  As described above, when the second great chance notice is executed, the SPSP reach is developed, and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach.

  As is clear from the description so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first display is performed over a period in which the target change is performed immediately before the target change and a period in which the target change is performed. When the second display control for variably displaying the effect symbols is performed in the effect symbol display area 7c of the screen 7a, the jackpot game is executed by using the mini character battle effect image display area 7d different from the effect symbol display area 7c. It is possible to execute a notice effect (in this embodiment, a mini-character battle effect) that gives a notice that a suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility of being performed is performed.

(About processing to realize mini-character battle effects)
Next, a process executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 to realize a mini-character battle effect will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 during the change display of the first special symbol and the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate is determined, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the above-mentioned pre-determination processing based on the special symbol success / failure determination random number or the variation pattern random number acquired in accordance with the winning, and transmits the special figure 1 start ball entry command including the preliminary determination result to the sub-control board. 90. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not to execute the mini character battle effect based on the result of the preliminary determination and the like included in the special figure 1 start entering command.

  Here, the mini-character battle effect in the present embodiment is a preview effect performed using two fluctuations of the target fluctuation and the pre-target fluctuation immediately before the target fluctuation. For this reason, when the special figure 1 start entering command transmitted from the main control board 80 receives the special figure 1 starting entering command, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the second and subsequent hold icons. It is determined whether the command is an instruction command. Here, if it is determined that the command is not a command for instructing the display of the second and subsequent hold icons, that is, if the command is a command for instructing the display of the first hold icon, the first battle in the mini-character battle effect May not be executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines not to execute the mini character battle effect.

  On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the received special figure 1 start ball entry command is a command instructing the display of the second and subsequent hold icons, the effect is included in the special figure 1 start ball input command. Based on the pre-determination result, the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in response to the suspended first special symbol appointment determination is specified based on the pre-determination result. Then, by referring to the fluctuation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specified fluctuation pattern and selecting a fluctuation effect pattern based on the fluctuation effect pattern determination table, a pseudo continuous production, an extended gimmick production, and a second great chance notice , And X battle are performed. Further, as described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect, and when it is determined to execute the icon change effect, the target change or the target change immediately before the target change. It is determined whether or not a change pattern for changing the display mode of the icon in the previous change is set.

  In this case, if none of the pseudo-sequence production, the development gimmick production, the second great chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change production (in the target change or the one before the target change) are performed, the mini-character is assumed. Even if a battle production is performed, it is not possible to perform a mini-character battle production in which the mini-own character loses twice in two battles. For this reason, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the pseudo continuous effect, the development gimmick effect, the second great chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change effect (in the target change or the preceding change before the target). If it is determined that there is no mini-character battle effect, it is determined not to execute the mini-character battle effect.

  In addition, as the production pattern of the mini-character battle production, the first production pattern in which the mini-owner character wins in both of the two battles, and the mini-character won in the first battle and loses in the second battle A second effect pattern and a third effect pattern in which the mini-owner character loses in the first battle and wins in the second battle are prepared. Therefore, when any one of the above-described effects is executed, a mini-character battle effect can be executed.

  On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute the mini-character battle effect in addition to the group announcement execution determination random number, the group announcement selection random number, and the light emission effect execution determination random number in the above-described random number update process. The processing of updating the random number for determining the execution of the mini-character battle effect is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. When the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the special figure 1 start entering ball command related to the first special symbol hit / fail determination, the main control board 80 determines the mini-character battle effect execution determination random number appropriately updated by the random number updating process. The count value at the time of receiving the 1 start ball entry command is acquired as a mini character battle effect execution determination random number.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether any one of the pseudo continuous effect, the development gimmick effect, the second great chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change effect (in the target change or in the preceding target change before the target change) is one. If it is determined to be executed, does the mini-character battle effect execution determination random number acquired when the special figure 1 start ball entry command is received match any one of the random number values stored in the ROM of the effect control board 90? It is determined whether or not to execute the mini-character battle effect based on whether or not to perform. Specifically, if the acquired random number of the mini-character battle effect is determined to match any one of the random numbers, it is determined that the mini-character battle effect is to be performed, and the obtained random number of the determined mini-character battle effect is equal to any of the random numbers. If not, it is determined not to execute the mini-character battle effect.

  Here, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines to execute the mini character battle effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an effect pattern of the mini character battle effect. For example, when one of the simulated continuous production, the development gimmick production, the second great chance notice, the X battle, and the icon change production is one of the suggested productions to be executed, the mini-owner character performs the first battle. In the second production pattern, where the player wins and obtains an icon that announces that the suggested production will be performed and loses in the second battle, or after the mini-owner character loses in the first battle In the second battle, the second effect pattern for obtaining an icon for notifying that any one of the suggestion effects is executed by winning is set. On the other hand, when there are a plurality of suggested effects to be executed, the first effect in which the mini-owner character wins both of the two battles and obtains an item that gives notice of execution of each suggested effect in each battle Set the pattern.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 transmits a command for instructing the execution of the mini character battle effect including the setting information indicating the effect pattern of the mini character battle effect to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. I do. On the other hand, the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106 perform an effect control necessary for realizing the instructed mini-character battle effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the degree of the possibility that the first great chance notice (see FIG. 74 (I)) is executed by the rank-up effect (see FIGS. 72 to 74) is determined. It is suggested. On the other hand, in the mini-character battle production, if the icon for notifying that the first great chance notice is executed is displayed, the function of the rank-up production is greatly impaired, and the interest of the rank-up production is remarkably increased. There is a possibility of lowering it. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the mini-character battle effect, an icon for notifying that the first great chance notice is executed is not displayed.

(Effects of mini-character battle effects)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect symbol is variably displayed in the effect symbol display area 7c of the first display screen 7a, a mini character battle effect image display (different from the effect symbol display area 7c). Using the area 7d, a notice effect (in the present embodiment, a mini-character battle effect) for notifying that a suggestion effect (which suggests that a jackpot game is likely to be executed) is executed is executed. For this reason, it is possible to execute a mini-character battle effect without interfering with the change display of the effect symbol, and a highly interesting effect is provided by a synergistic effect of the variable effect of displaying the effect symbol and the mini-character battle effect. It is possible to do.

  Further, according to such a gaming machine, a period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in a state where the right to determine whether or not the first special symbol is valid (a period in which the pre-target fluctuation is performed) and the first special symbol are performed. The mini-character battle effect is executed over a period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed (period in which the target fluctuation is performed) in response to the symbol correctness determination being performed. Therefore, compared to the case where the mini-character battle effect is performed using only the latter period, the mini-character battle effect is less subject to time constraints, and it is possible to execute various mini-character battle effects with a longer effect time. It is.

(Modifications related to mini-character battle effects)
Note that the following configuration may be adopted for mini-character battle effects.
That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the suggestion effect is performed based on the result of a total of two battles, such as performing the first battle in the pre-target fluctuation immediately before the target fluctuation and performing the second battle in the target fluctuation. Has been described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the battle may be performed only once in one of the target fluctuation and the pre-target fluctuation immediately before the target fluctuation. Further, for example, a total of three battles may be performed using the target fluctuation, the pre-target fluctuation immediately before the target fluctuation, and the pre-target fluctuation two before the target fluctuation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which, even if the player loses the first battle, the game develops into the second battle, but if the player loses the first battle, the game does not develop into the second battle. Good. In addition, when a configuration in which a total of three battles are performed as described above is employed, if the second battle is lost, the battle does not evolve into the third battle, and if the first battle is lost, the battle is lost. It is also conceivable to employ a configuration that does not develop into the second and subsequent battles.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol display area 7b is a display area above the reserved icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e, and the effect symbol display area 7c is centered substantially at the center of the first display screen 7a. The effect symbol display area 7b is a reduced display area, and the case where the mini character battle effect image display area 7d is an upper area of the effect symbol display area 7c has been described as an example. The size and position are not limited to those exemplified in the form, and may be other sizes and positions.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the item is displayed after the battle is performed (notifying that the suggested effect is executed) in the mini-character battle effect image display area 7d, but in other embodiments, the battle is performed. One or more items may be displayed without performing. That is, the notice effect that gives a notice that the suggestion effect is to be performed is not limited to the effect that gives a notice of the execution of the suggestion effect in accordance with the result of the battle. May be displayed in advance (relevant to the suggested effect).

[Specific examples of variable display of effect symbols]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the effect symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105. Here, FIG. 102 to FIG. 105 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Up to this point, for the sake of convenience of explanation that the description relating to the variable display of the effect symbol is not unnecessarily complicated, the description regarding the variable effect has been described assuming that each effect symbol is composed of only numbers. Each effect design that constitutes the symbol sequence is a number representing a number different from other effect designs, a character image showing a character corresponding to the number, and a vertically long panel image functioning as a background of the number and the character image. (See FIG. 102A).

  FIG. 102 (A) shows a break of “835” that notifies that the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a loss in a state where three hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 9c. A state in which three effect symbols are completely stopped is illustrated. When a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three effect symbols are completely stopped, the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is selected. The determination is executed, and in response to this, the variable display of the first special symbol and the scroll display of the three symbol columns are started (see FIG. 102 (B)). Accordingly, the first hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c are shifted toward the icon display area 9e. A shift process is performed (see FIGS. 102A and 102B).

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the scroll display of the three symbol columns, for example, the left four symbols stop in a pseudo manner (see FIG. 102 (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102 (C), when the scroll speed of the left symbol row gradually decreases to “0” to display the left four symbols, the left four symbols are displayed. Is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise alternately with the scroll direction (downward) of the three symbol rows as the axial direction. Along with this, the number “4” constituting the left four symbols rotates one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character images constituting the left four symbols show. The character D performs a predetermined action.

  In this way, when the number "4" constituting the left four symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereafter, the number "4" constituting the four left symbols and the character D are shown. When the character image and the panel images constituting the four left symbols are integrally rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the pseudo stop of the four left symbols is continued ( FIG. 102 (D)).

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the left four symbols have been pseudo-stopped, for example, the right six symbols have been pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 102 (D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102 (D), when the scroll speed of the right symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, for example, when the right six symbols are displayed, the right six symbols are displayed. The panel image forming the symbol rotates clockwise and counterclockwise alternately with the scroll direction as the axial direction. Along with this, the number “6” constituting the six right symbols rotates one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character images constituting the six right symbols show. The character F performs a predetermined action. Then, when the numeral "6" constituting the right six symbols makes one revolution counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereafter, the numeral "6" constituting the right six symbols, a character image showing the character F, The pseudo stop of the six right symbols is continued by integrally rotating the panel images constituting the six right symbols clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction (FIG. 102 ( E)).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the right six symbols have been pseudo-stopped, the middle one symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 102 (E)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102 (E), when the scroll speed of the middle symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, for example, when the middle one symbol is displayed, the middle one symbol is displayed. The panel image forming the symbol rotates clockwise and counterclockwise alternately with the scroll direction as the axial direction. Along with this, the number "1" constituting the middle one symbol rotates one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character image constituting the middle one symbol shows. Character A performs a predetermined action. Then, when the number "1" constituting the middle one symbol makes one revolution counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereafter, the number "1" constituting the middle one symbol, a character image showing the character A, When the panel images constituting the middle one symbol are integrally rotated alternately clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the pseudo stop of the middle one symbol is continued.

  Here, the determination result of the first special symbol right / wrong determination is “losing”, and as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a variation pattern in which the variation time for executing the loss notification effect without performing the reach effect is short. If set, the four left symbols, the six right symbols, and the middle one that have been pseudo-stopped are permanently stopped as they are, and a loss is reported (see FIG. 102 (F)).

  As described above, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the three rendering symbols indicating the break of “416” are completely stopped, the first symbol displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is displayed. The first special symbol hit / fail judgment corresponding to the reserved icon is executed, and in response to this, scroll display of the first special symbol and three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 102 (G)). Along with this, the first hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c are moved to the icon display area 9e side. A shift process for shifting is performed (see FIGS. 102 (F) and (G)).

  When the first hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, immediately after that, the icon (here, the white icon) is changed to, for example, a green icon. A change effect may be performed (see FIGS. 102 (G) and (H)).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the change display of the first special symbol and the scroll display of the three symbol columns corresponding to the icon (here, the green icon) are started, for example, the left six symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 102 ( I)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 102 (I), when the scroll speed of the left symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, for example, when the left six symbols are displayed, the left six symbols are displayed. The panel image forming the symbol rotates clockwise and counterclockwise alternately with the scroll direction as the axial direction. Along with this, the number "6" constituting the left six symbols rotates one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and although not shown in the figure, the character images constituting the left six symbols are shown. The character F performs a predetermined action.

  In this way, when the number "6" constituting the left six symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, thereafter, the number "6" constituting the six left symbols and the character F are shown. When the character image and the panel images constituting the left six symbols integrally rotate alternately clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the pseudo stop of the left six symbols is continued ( FIG. 103 (A)).

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the left six symbols have been pseudo stopped, for example, the right two symbols have been pseudo stopped (see FIG. 103 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (A), when the scroll speed of the right symbol row is reduced to multiplication and division to become “0”, for example, when the right two symbols are displayed, the right two symbols are displayed. The panel image and the character image constituting the design swing up and down. Along with this, the numeral “2” constituting the two right symbols makes one rotation counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. Then, immediately after that, the two right symbols slide, and the scroll display of the right symbol column is restarted (see FIG. 103 (B)), and immediately after that, a pseudo continuous effect is generated (FIG. 103 (C) to (C)). (E)). Specifically, an effect display showing a state in which the scroll speed of the right symbol row and the middle row of symbol rows rapidly decreases, and the right two symbols and the middle seven symbols (pseudo continuous symbols) descend together. (See FIGS. 103 (C) and (D)). At about the same time when these symbols move to substantially the same height as the left six symbols, the left six symbols and the right three symbols are not displayed, and the middle seven symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 103 (E)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (E), the panel image and the character image forming the middle seven symbols swing in the vertical direction, and the number “7” forming the middle seven symbols is scrolled. One rotation counterclockwise with the direction as the axial direction.

  When the first pseudo continuous production is performed in this way, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted, and the second pseudo fluctuation production is started (see FIG. 103 (F)). Subsequently, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating effect of the second pseudo simulation, for example, the left four symbols stop pseudo (see FIG. 103 (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (G), when the scroll speed of the left symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, four left symbols are displayed, and a panel constituting the four left symbols is displayed. As the image alternately rotates clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number “4” that constitutes the four left symbols becomes one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. I do. At this time, although not shown in the figure, a character D indicated by a character image constituting the four left symbols performs a predetermined action. After that, the number "4" constituting the four left symbols, the character image representing the character D, and the panel image constituting the four left symbols are integrated into a clockwise and counterclockwise direction with the scroll direction as the axial direction. , The pseudo stop of the four left symbols is continued (see FIG. 103 (H)).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses after the left four symbols are pseudo-stopped, for example, the right four symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 103 (H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 103 (H), when the scroll speed of the right symbol row gradually decreases to “0”, four right symbols are displayed, and a panel constituting the right four symbols is displayed. As the image alternately rotates clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, the number "4" constituting the right four symbols turns one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. I do. At this time, although not shown in the figure, a character D indicated by a character image constituting the four right symbols performs a predetermined action. After that, the number "4" constituting the four right symbols, the character image showing the character D, and the panel image constituting the four right symbols are integrated into a clockwise and counterclockwise direction with the scroll direction as the axial direction. , The pseudo stop of the four right symbols is continued.

  As described above, when the same four symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reach is established (see FIG. 103 (H)), an area for displaying an effect image relating to the reach effect is displayed in the center of the first display screen 7a. In order to secure them, the four left symbols shift leftward and the right four symbols shift rightward (see FIG. 103 (I)). Thereafter, the numbers, character images, and panel images forming the four left symbols swing together up and down, and the numbers, character images, and panel images forming the right four patterns swing together up and down. In the moving state, a predetermined normal short reach is performed (see FIG. 104A).

  At the end of the normal short reach, a long development suggestion effect indicating the development to the normal long reach is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 69 (A) (see FIG. 104 (B)). The reach effect may evolve to a normal long reach (see FIG. 104 (C)). When this normal long reach is developed, an effect design composed of numbers, character images, and panel images is an effect composed only of numbers that are larger than those composed of numbers, character images, and panel images. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a as a symbol. FIG. 104 (C) shows an effect in which a predetermined character is expected to be aligned in a state in which four left symbols and four right symbols (only composed of numbers) are pseudo-stopped so as to swing up and down as reach symbols. A state in which display is performed is illustrated.

  Next, during this normal long reach, the predetermined character sets a storm symbol, which is a special symbol indicating that the effect mode changes from the normal mode to the storm mode with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, during the reach symbol. (See FIG. 104D). When this storm symbol is displayed, a pseudo-run is generated after the reach as the second pseudo-sequence effect in the current symbol fluctuation, and the pseudo-sequence fluctuation effect is started (see FIG. 104 (E)). . Although not shown in FIG. 104, when the mode shifts to the storm mode, the characters “storm mode” are displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 79 (E)).

  When a predetermined time elapses after the third pseudo pattern has been developed, the left three symbols and the right three symbols are pseudo-stopped, and reach is established (see FIG. 104 (F)). In a state where this reach is established, a reach effect having a higher jackpot reliability than a normal short reach such as a normal long reach, a first SP reach, and a second SP reach is not performed. A pseudo stop is performed so that two three symbols composed of a character image indicating C and a panel image swing up and down as a reach symbol.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the establishment of the reach, a development effect leading to the first SP reach is performed (see FIGS. 104 (G) to (I)). Specifically, first, as illustrated in FIG. 104 (G), the numeral “3” constituting the left three symbols makes one rotation clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and forms the left three symbols. The character image and the panel image are also rotated twice clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and an effect display indicating a state where the character image and the panel image are separated from the number “3” is performed. Along with this, the number of “3” constituting the three right symbols makes one rotation clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and the character image and the panel image constituting the three right symbols are also counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. An effect display indicating that the character image and the panel image are separated from the number “3” by rotating clockwise twice.

  When the character image and the panel image are separated from the three left symbols and the three right symbols in this way, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), these images fade out from the first display screen 7a, and The three left symbols and the right three symbols composed of only the numeral “3” are enlarged and displayed. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 104 (I), in the process of moving to the upper left area of the first display screen 7a while the three left symbols are being reduced, one rotation is made clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. In the process of moving to the upper left area, and simultaneously moving to the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while reducing the three right symbols, one rotation is made clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and then to the upper right. Move to the area. The reach symbol moved to the upper left area and the upper right area on the first display screen 7a is pseudo-stop-displayed by rotating clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. This pseudo stop display of the reach symbol is continued until the end of the SPSP reach (see FIGS. 70 and 71).

  By the way, if a reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol) composed of a number, a character image, and a panel image is reduced and displayed as it is in an upper left area and an upper right area, respectively, the numerals constituting the reach symbol May become smaller than necessary, and as a result, the player may not be able to easily visually recognize in which of the effect symbols the reach is established. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the character image and the panel image are separated from the effect design composed of the numbers, the character image, and the panel image, and the effect design consisting only of the numbers is reduced and displayed as the reach symbol. I'm supposed to.

  When the left symbol and the right symbol as the reach symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, the first SP reach is executed using the central area of the first display screen 7a. (See FIG. 105A). As illustrated in FIG. 105 (A), with the development to the first SP reach, the holding icon and the effect image constituting the holding icon display area 9c (in this embodiment, the pedestal of each holding icon) are deleted. You. Here, for example, when a variable effect pattern that evolves from the first SP reach to the X battle is set, the following effect is performed. That is, for example, when approaching the end of the first SP reach, a similar losing effect of pseudo stopping the middle symbol (here, the middle four symbols) different from the reach symbol in the central area of the first display screen 7a is performed (FIG. 105). (B)).

  When this similar losing effect is performed, although it is not shown in FIG. 105, it is supposed that three effect symbols indicating the reach losing eyes of “343” are finally stopped, and are displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a. The character "roulette chance" may be displayed (see FIG. 80 (H)). Then, when the character “roulette chance” is displayed, a development destination selection effect of selecting the type of SPSP reach to be developed is performed (see FIG. 105 (C)). This development destination selection effect is as described above with reference to FIG. 69 (D) and the like.

  When the first effect button 63a is operated during the effective period of the development destination selection effect, any one of the four panels (here, the X battle panel) of the development destination selection effect is highlighted. In the displayed state, with the end of the development destination selection effect, a development suggestion effect of enlarging and displaying the highlighted panel in the central area of the first display screen 7a is performed (see FIG. 105 (D)). .

  As described above, when the development suggestion effect indicating that the game develops into any of the SPSP reach (here, X battle) is performed, the above-described development gimmick effect is performed based on FIG. 69 (F) and the like. 105 (E)). Then, although not shown in FIG. 105, the above-described dark turning effect is performed based on FIG. 87 (B) and the like, and subsequently, the above-described second great opportunity notice is performed based on FIG. 69 (G) and the like. (See FIG. 105 (F)). Note that FIG. 105 illustrates a case in which a second large chance notice is performed following the dark turn effect, but the own character appearance notice (not the second large chance notice) follows the dark turn effect (FIG. 87 ( C) may be performed, and the former has higher jackpot reliability than the latter.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment in the low-probability / low-base state is as follows (after the jackpot game ends, small hits frequently occur and it is possible to acquire many prize balls until the next big hit). In the case of the 4R first jackpot (shift to the high-probability low-base state) (see FIG. 6), the player performs a victory effect of victory over the enemy character X in the X battle, and enters the low-probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game. In the case of a 4R second jackpot to be shifted (see FIG. 6), a configuration is adopted in which the X battle itself is not performed even when the game progresses to SPSP reach, that is, another battle is performed for SPSP reach. ing. In addition, in the case of a large hit with seven symbols aligned in the low-probability low-base state, a configuration is also adopted in which the game always shifts to the high-probability low-base state after the big hit game ends.

  Therefore, when the X battle is developed in a state in which the reach symbol (here, three symbols) other than the seven symbols is displayed in the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, the title of the X battle is displayed. When the display (see FIG. 105 (G)) is performed, the reach symbol is changed to seven symbols (see FIGS. 105 (F) and (G)). FIGS. 105 (F) and (G) illustrate a state where the reach symbol changes from 3 symbols to 7 symbols.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination in the low-probability / low-base state is the 4R first big hit (see FIG. 6), the normal short reach, the normal long reach, There is a case where a hit notification effect in which the symbols other than the seven symbols are aligned in a battle other than the X battle of the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach. In these cases, when the big hit game of 4R is being performed, the battle between the player's character and the enemy character (for example, the enemy character X) is performed, and (the transition to the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit game is over) (To inform) A victory effect indicating that the character wins in the battle is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment in the low-probability / low-base state is a 4R second jackpot (see FIG. 6), a similar battle is performed during the 4R jackpot game, In order to shift to the low-probability high base state without shifting to the low base state, a defeat effect indicating that the character is defeated in the battle is performed. Also, if your character wins the enemy character X in the X battle, there is no need to perform the above victory effects during the jackpot game, so during the jackpot game, the battle between your own character and the enemy character A different predetermined jackpot effect is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the game develops into an X battle in a state where a reach symbol other than the seven symbols is displayed in the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, the game develops into an X battle. When doing this, a symbol change effect of changing the reach symbol to seven symbols is performed, but in other embodiments, the following symbol change effect may be performed. That is, regarding the title display of X battle, the title of “VS enemy character X” is displayed without displaying the four stars indicating the expected victory of the own character. Then, after erasing this title, four stars indicating the expected degree of victory of the character are displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually enlarged while being moved downward (for example, to the height of the four stars). The enlarged reach display is performed, and in the process of the enlarged move display, the two reach symbols are changed to seven symbols. When the enlarged movement display is completed, seven symbols are displayed in the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a as reach symbols.

  As in the present embodiment, when the reach symbol displayed in the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a is changed to 7 symbols without changing its display position, for example, a game When the player is gazing at another location on the first display screen 7a, the player does not notice the symbol change effect in which the reach symbol changes to 7 symbols, and a sufficient effect of the symbol change effect cannot be obtained. Can be considered. On the other hand, if the design change effect accompanying the enlarged movement display is performed, the player can easily notice that the design change effect is being performed, and a sufficient effect of the design change effect cannot be obtained. The problem described above can be effectively suppressed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 105, when the X battle is started, during the X battle, an X battle reach effect image showing a situation in which the player character and the enemy character X are attacking and defending is displayed on the first display screen 7a ( FIG. 105 (H)). Then, when approaching the end of the X battle, the first effect button operation promoting effect is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 69 (I) (see FIG. 105 (I)). The effect after the first effect button operation promoting effect is performed is the same as the effect described with reference to FIGS.

  As is clear from the description so far based on FIGS. 102 to 105, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, 1 to 9 symbols, which are effect symbols constituting symbol columns of a left column, a middle column, and a right column. Is configured to include numbers, character images, and panel images, and when the effect design is pseudo-stopped, the numbers making up the effect design make one revolution counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. Along with this, the panel images constituting the effect symbols alternately rotate clockwise and counterclockwise with the scroll direction of each symbol row as the axial direction, and the character indicated by the character image performs a predetermined action.

(Effects by the variable display of the effect design)
According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed, the numbers constituting the effect symbol are in the first direction (the scroll direction is the axial direction) different from the changing direction (the scroll direction). (In the counterclockwise direction), it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect symbol is pseudo-stopping, and, for example, compared to a case where the effect symbol is simply oscillated to cause a pseudo stop. Thus, it is possible to improve the amusement of the production using the production design.

  Also, when the effect symbol is displayed in a pseudo stop, the numbers, character images, and panel images constituting the effect symbol operate in different directions from each other. In comparison, it is possible to dramatically improve the amusement of the effect using the effect symbol.

(Modified example related to variable display of effect symbols)
Note that the following configuration may be employed for the variable display of the effect symbols.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case has been described in which, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the numbers constituting the effect symbol make one turn counterclockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction, but the rotation angle of the number is 360 degrees. It is not limited. That is, for example, when the effect symbol composed of the numeral facing diagonally forward right is pseudo-stopped, the scroll direction is rotated counterclockwise by, for example, 10 degrees in the scroll direction, and the pachinko machine is rotated. The rotation angle of the numeral may be a small angle, such as facing the front of the gaming machine 1. Conversely, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the numeral constituting the effect symbol may be rotated by an angle larger than 360 degrees, such as by rotating the number constituting the effect symbol two times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described where the rotation direction of the numbers constituting the effect design is counterclockwise (the scroll direction is the axial direction), but the rotation direction of the numbers is the scroll direction in the axial direction. Other directions such as a clockwise direction may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a character image or a panel image is added to all effect symbols of 1 to 9 symbols constituting each symbol row, but in other embodiments, 1 to 9 symbols are used. A configuration may be adopted in which a character image or a panel image is added to a part of the effect symbols, and the character image or the panel image is not added to the remaining effect images.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect image is composed of numbers, character images, and panel images has been described, but the effect design may be composed of numerals (excluding the panel image) and character images. . In this case, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, a predetermined action is performed on the character indicated by the character image constituting the effect symbol, and the numbers constituting the effect symbol are counterclockwise (with the scroll direction as the axial direction). One example is to perform display control such as making one rotation every time.

  Further, the effect symbols constituting the left and right columns of the symbol sequence may be effect symbols composed of only numbers, and the middle symbol line may be an effect symbol composed of numerals and character images. In this case, when the effect symbol in the left column is pseudo-stop, the number is operated in a direction different from the scroll direction, and when the effect symbol in the right column is pseudo-stop, the number is operated in a direction different from the scroll direction. It is conceivable to perform display control such that when the effect symbols in the row are pseudo-stopped, the numbers are operated in a direction different from the scroll direction and the character is caused to perform a predetermined action.

  Further, when the symbol row is scroll-displayed, an effect symbol composed of numbers having no character image is displayed, and when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the character image is displayed on the number constituting the effect symbol. A configuration such as addition may be adopted. In this case, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stopped, the numbers constituting the effect symbol are operated in a direction different from the scroll direction, and at the same time, the character indicated by the character image added to the number performs a predetermined action. Control may be performed.

[Other aspects]
In the present embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are changed according to the game state to a special symbol set as a main player of the game in the game state (a first special symbol or a later-described special symbol). The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). In other words, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. There is a case and a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. By changing to such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Also, when displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the subject of the game in the gaming state is displayed in a large size (subject). And the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (other special symbol) which is not the main player of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are both displayed in accordance with the game state and the game situation. One of the effect symbols and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) may be displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-described gaming machine, a "variable entrance" which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball, "Special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is in a state in which the variable entrance can be entered when the result of the first hit determination or the second hit determination is a hit. Further, the “second starting port” may be a variable starting port that is changeable between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first mode. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than the game state. And a state (second game state). Here, the “predetermined frequency” includes 0.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is one, but the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is plural. The number of rounds may be different, or a round having a different number of times of opening may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are control processing that can be simultaneously changed. However, the control processing that uses the second special figure reservation in preference to the first special figure reservation is performed. A so-called special figure 2 priority control processing, a control processing in which the first special figure reservation is used prior to the second special figure reservation, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control processing may be used. In addition, the priority is not set for the digestion of the first special figure reservation and the digestion of the second special figure reservation, and the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion may be used.

  A pachinko gaming machine of a type not provided with a probability setting means (without a high probability state), having a specific area inside, a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible ball entry state is provided, and the winning port is set in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entry into the starting port becomes a small hit. When a game ball enters the large winning opening in the ball possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, the game becomes a big hit, a big hit game is executed, and the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, a high base state in which the frequency of game balls entering the starting port is increased can be given. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the large hit probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating / activating the probability varying function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Is also good. Furthermore, a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), and the like. A plurality of types of probability conditions defining a relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for the advance determination based on the starting ball entry, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read, and the read acquired random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Preliminary judgment) is to be performed (“Starting ball entry processing (S205)”; see FIG. 11 and FIG. 13), but the method of the preliminary judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing acquisition information to be subjected to the preliminary determination (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball entry) is provided by the main control unit and the sub control unit. May be provided in the RAM of the unit, and the acquisition information stored in the storage area (the storage unit for the preliminary determination) may be determined (prior determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to delete the acquired information used in the preliminary determination (the acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it is also possible to make a preliminary decision on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, the determination may be made in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure suspension storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reserved storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reserved storage unit for the preliminary decision. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the effect mode D (state C, specific game state), when a specific period is started in a situation where three or more small hits are continuously stored, during the specific period, The display of the number-of-prize-balls image S and the addition display of the prize-ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed based on the ball entering the small winning opening for small hits and the like. An effect is performed in which the acquired prize ball number indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (totaled) to the acquired prize ball number (total acquired prize ball number, total acquired prize ball number) of the prize ball count image C1. Had become. On the other hand, when a new second special map reservation (ball entry to the third starting port 26) occurs during the specific period, and the reservation is determined to be the small hit reservation by the preliminary determination (the reservation pre-reading). , The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hits are continuously stored, and two small hits are consumed after the start of the specific period. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “2”. In this situation, if a new second special map reservation occurs and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes “3” and the reservation is preliminarily determined to be a small hit reservation, a specific period counter (see S5005) Is incremented by “+1” (1 addition). Thereby, the newly generated (stored) small hit holding is consumed, and the specific period is extended until the small hit game related to the small hit holding is completed. Alternatively, after the specific period is started, two small hits are consumed and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes "2". It is assumed that the second special figure reservation to be performed and the second special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “4” occur in succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “3” is the off-hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “4” is the small hit reserve in advance. Assume that it is determined. In this case, by incrementing the specific period counter (see S5005) by “+2” (addition of 2), the small hit holding corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “4” is consumed, and the small hit change and the small hit game are completed. Until you do so, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period in which the display of the number-of-prize-ball images S and the additional display of the prize-ball count image C2 (the second profit effect) is performed. Since it extends, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, two conditions of (1) that at least three small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning in the lottery at the start of the specific period are set as two conditions of the start of the specific period. Although the condition has been described, the start condition of the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality (for example, two or more) of small hits that are not continuous are stored, or a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) of small hits are stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. May be used as the start condition of the specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to be generated (started more easily). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) out of (1) and (2) described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) occurs, before the transition to the state C, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C If the big hit is a 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), a mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the big hit game, and the 15R big hit (15R No. In the case of three big hits, a mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (start of 14R to halfway of 15R in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of rounds of the big hit that triggers the setting of the state C is, for example, one of 10 rounds, and the game state when the 10R big hit occurs is the state A (left-handed game), the ending period If a mode selection period occurs during the state B or C (right-handed game), the mode selection period may be generated in a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R middle). In the latter case, notification that the mode selection period is to be started from the next round (a notification before the start of the selection period) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. In addition, the generation timing when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that is the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, from 5R start to 6R end. , Or the last round only, or any other round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the ending period of the jackpot, a notification that the mode selection period is to be started thereafter (a notification before the start of the selection period) is performed in the round effect of the last round before the start of the ending period. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, in the effect mode selection in the mode selection period, any one of a plurality of effect modes determined in advance may be automatically selected by lottery on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, at the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulette shapes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, and An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect during the mode selection period (mode selection effect). Further, in the present embodiment, the effect modes in the state C are two types (the effect modes C and D).

  In addition, the effects (variation mode, stop mode, reach effect mode, etc.) relating to the variable display of the effect symbols shown in the above-described embodiment, and the effect executed in accordance with the small hit in the state C (the effect mode C, D). (A small hit look-ahead effect, a first profit effect, a second profit effect, and the like), a notice effect (display of a notice image) in the effect mode D, a notification screen and a mode selection screen relating to a mode selection period, and the like. Various effects are merely examples, and the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the preview image in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the preview image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device including a liquid crystal display, other display means (effect display device) for effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided. May be configured to be able to execute a preview effect corresponding to the display of the preview image.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a display unit that performs variable display of identification information and that can execute a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of the variable display being a specific display result. I have. In this type of gaming machine, the result of the variable display can be shown (notified) to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, JP-A-2008-370).

  In the gaming machine provided with the above-described display means, the player proceeds with the game by paying attention to the identification information displayed on the display means. However, the player becomes tired of the game while the display of the change of the identification information is repeated many times, and it is difficult to maintain interest in the game. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to realize display of a new mode of interest to a player with respect to display of identification information, thereby improving amusement of a game. It is to plan.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and is capable of notifying a result of the variable display by a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
A variable display unit capable of performing a variable display of the identification information;
The change display means,
When stopping the variable display of the identification information, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the stop mode when stopping the variable display depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display is performed by the variable display means, when the variable display is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. Then, the stop mode can be made different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. For this reason, the player can guess the display mode of the subsequently displayed (derived display) identification information, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable information display is stopped. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
At least the first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order and the stop order of the plurality of symbols are the first stop mode in stopping the variable display of the identification information. A second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the stop order.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode which is a trigger for executing a predetermined special game and a second display which is a trigger for executing another special game different from the predetermined special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The change display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the identification information is variably displayed by the variably displayed symbols. In such a configuration, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order as the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols. A first stop mode, and a second stop mode that is a second stop sequence different from the first stop sequence (first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode which is a trigger for execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode which is a trigger for execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of Then, when the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is performed in the first stop order ( In the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is stopped in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. For this reason, the player can guess the type of the special game that can be executed, whether or not the special game can be executed, the possibility of the execution, and the like, through the stop mode when the change display of the identification information stops. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the change display of the identification information is stopped, and to excite a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, further, there is a fourth display mode that does not trigger execution of the special game,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, a third stop mode in which the stop timings of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The change display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the change display of the identification information (a plurality of symbols), a special game is further executed. If the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped is the fourth display mode, the fourth display mode that does not serve as a trigger is provided. In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of a plurality of symbols are substantially the same, it is possible to stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols. For this reason, in the case where the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed, the mode in which the variable display is stopped includes a mode in which it is possible to immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game (third mode). Becomes possible. This makes it possible to diversify the stop modes when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game from being unnecessarily aroused.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
When the change display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. In this case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, the fact that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the execution of the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode is emphasized and indicated to the player. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of rendering when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
A state control unit capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second game state is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is higher in the frequency of the first display mode than the first game mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as gaming states when the identification information is fluctuated and displayed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed when the variable display is stopped becomes the first display mode more frequently. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the execution of the display of the first display mode is higher than in the first display mode. For this reason, in the second game state, the frequency of the change display of the identification information stopping in the first stop mode increases. Thereby, in the second game state, the player is focused on whether or not the change display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is raised. It becomes possible to instigate.

Gaming machine Reference Invention 1-6, in the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
The type of symbols constituting the identification information has at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type,
The first display mode is configured by a symbol of a second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
In the first gaming state, at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type is a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type as types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among the first symbol type and the second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set to the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become something. For this reason, in the first gaming state, a symbol that cannot constitute the first display mode because it is a symbol of the first symbol type is changed to a symbol that can constitute the first display mode by entering the second gaming state. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to not only the stop mode when the change display of the identification information is stopped but also the symbol type.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 1, regarding the display of the identification information, it is possible to realize a display in a new mode that attracts the player's interest, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter a game ball into a variable entrance (for example, a special winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable entrance. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined game profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on the game profit. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit provided in response to the entry of a game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit (acquired profit amount) to be obtained by the player is determined by a predetermined value. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

  However, the display of the acquired profit amount as described above is already adopted by many gaming machines, and is an effect lacking in freshness. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect of a new mode as an effect for displaying an acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment. .

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Profit granting means capable of granting a predetermined game profit based on entry into the variable entrance,
Profit effect execution means capable of executing a profit effect for displaying an obtained profit amount when a game profit is provided by the profit provision means,
State control means capable of controlling a game state,
The state control means can control the game state to a specific game state based on establishment of a control condition,
The profit effect execution means includes, at least, a first profit effect in which an acquired profit amount is added and displayed based on a ball entering the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the first profit effect in a specific period in the specific game state And a second profit effect in which the obtained profit amount is added and displayed based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the variable entrance when being controlled to the specific game state, and a predetermined game profit is given to the player in response to the ball, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as an effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of the game profit to be given (acquired profit amount), of which the second profit effect is performed. Is executed during a specific period in the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to a profit effect executed based on the ball entry into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect execution means may execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and may execute the first profit effect in the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on a predetermined second display unit without executing the effect,
After the end of the specific period, an effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific gaming state, in a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance, and in the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance. When the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the obtained profit amount (the obtained profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding and displaying (summing) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. Thus, it is possible to change the display mode of the acquired profit amount during the specific game state to enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of an acquisition condition,
Identification information display means capable of executing a variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information;
A preliminary determination unit capable of performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information before performing the variable display,
It is possible to enter the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific game state. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information. As a result, a specific display result is derived, and as a result, it becomes possible to enter the variable entrance. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in a situation in which it is determined that it is possible to enter the variable entrance with a predetermined number of specific acquisition information as an opportunity. Thereby, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and to increase the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
The specific period ends when it is possible to enter the variable entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means as an opportunity at the start of the specific period. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the ball enters the variable entrance. After the operation becomes possible, the specific period ends. Thus, it is possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 or 2-4 described above,
The advance determination means can execute the advance determination even during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on that a new determination result indicating that the information is specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the advance determination can be performed even during the specific period, and the advance determination is performed on the acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the result of the determination is obtained, the specific period is extended. This extends the period in which the second profit effect is executed, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on that a determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect of the predetermined effect to be executed differs depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the obtained information is the specific obtained information, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The effect mode differs depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored when the predetermined effect is executed. Thereby, during the specific game state, it is possible to produce the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the specific game state.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 2, it is possible to realize a novel mode of effect as an effect for displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been widely known gaming machines that perform variable display of identification information and can execute a special game based on a display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is a gaming machine of this type that is configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (for example, see Patent Document 1). The timing at which the effect mode can be selected can be set at various times, for example, during the change display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game). It is possible. In some configurations in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game is selected (see, for example, JP-A-2006-174956).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem of lack of freshness. there were. The present invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to select a staging mode after a special game in a new mode, and to improve the game entertainment. .

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game is constituted by a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured so that a ball can be entered into the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, a selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from the plurality of effect modes,
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a first notification unit that performs notification before the start of the selection period in a round game before the predetermined round game is provided. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. If the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, a notification before the start of the selection period is made in a round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, it is informed in advance in the round game before that the effect mode selection is possible in the predetermined round game during the special game (the selection period occurs), and then the effect mode selection period is selected. It is possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as when an occurrence (start) occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

  Note that the selection of the effect mode in the selection period includes, for example, manual selection in which the player selects and inputs one of the effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. An automatic selection in which one is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a second notification unit for performing notification during the selection period in the predetermined round game,
When the predetermined round game is completed and the next round game is started, a third notification means for performing notification before the end of the selection period is provided,
The selection period ends during a round game in which the notification by the third notification unit is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when an effect mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is performed in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game ends. Is started, in the round game (the next round game after the predetermined round game), notification before the end of the selection period is performed. The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is made (during the round game following the predetermined round game). For this reason, when the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game, notification before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game (notification by the first notification means) and the predetermined A special game is provided by a notification during the selection period performed in the round game (reporting by the second notification unit) and a notification before the end of the selection period performed by the next round game after the predetermined round game (reporting by the third notification unit). It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. As described above, by adopting a new notification mode such as prompting the player to select an effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-described notification is performed from before the start of the selection period to the end thereof, so that the player can select the production mode. It is possible to prevent the opportunity of selecting the effect mode from being missed without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
A state control unit capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second game state. The generation time of the selection period is different from the case where the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the first game state, and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The generation time of the effect mode selection period is different between the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the state. Thereby, it is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode such that the subsequent effect mode selectable time differs depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Becomes possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
If the said variable display of the display result in the first game mode is the special game is a particular display result is performed, together with the selection period after every round game constituting the special game is completed is generated Notification during the selection period is performed,
In the case where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game. Things.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the first game state, all round games constituting the special game have been completed. Later, the effect mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game during the special game is performed. In this case, the effect mode selection period is generated. In this case, the above-described notification by the first notification unit (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification unit (notification during the selection period), and Notification by three notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. For this reason, when the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed in the first game state, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the second game state is set. In the case where the special display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode before all round games are completed. This makes it possible to make the mode of effect mode selection different depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and gives a different impression to the player. Can be given.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
Having a plurality of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period varies depending on the type of the special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation time of the effect mode selection period differs depending on the type of the special game executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. This makes it possible to select an effect mode in a novel mode, such as making the effect mode selectable time different depending on the type of the special game to be executed, thereby preventing the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game having a larger number of round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period is generated after all round games constituting the first special game are completed, and the notification during the selection period is performed,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game have been completed. Later, a production mode selection period occurs, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large is executed, a selection period of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, notification by the above-described first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) Notification). For this reason, when the first special game (special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the completion of all round games, and the second special game is performed. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the end of all round games. This makes it possible to make the mode of effect mode selection different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player. Become.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 3, by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new mode, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 4)
Also, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port. In the low base state, there is a game that aims at the first starting opening, and in the high base state, there is a game that aims at the second starting opening. Further, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the player hits the right area of the gaming area when the jackpot game or the high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in the low base state, the player plays a left-handed game, and once in the advantageous state, plays the game in the right-handed game until the advantageous state ends, thereby sharpening the game in the advantageous state. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it is difficult to say that an efficient game can be advanced. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the game and increase game efficiency. In addition, a gaming machine that enhances amusement in games is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is:
A specific starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting port,
Identification information to be displayed variably based on the ball entering the variable starting port,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a specific game execution unit that executes a specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state;
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance enters a ball-enterable state,
A specific starting port, a first variable entrance port, a variable starting port, and a second variable entrance port are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific starting port, the first variable entrance, the variable starting entrance, and the second variable entrance are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. Downstream from, a specific starting port, a first variable entrance, a variable starting port, and a second variable entrance are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

  Specifically, in order for the game to proceed smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable starting port related to execution of the special game to the second state (open state). Place it at the top of the ball opening. Thereby, the possibility that the variable starting port is first set to the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, by setting the gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that has entered (passed) the specific starting port flows down the game area thereafter, the subsequent game proceeds smoothly. In addition, by disposing the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific starting port, it is possible to quickly enter a ball when a special game is executed, and to obtain a large number of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable ball entry port upstream of the variable start port, a game ball enters the variable start port in the second state during the special game, and the first variable ball entry port is provided to the first variable ball entry port. It is also possible to prevent a situation where entry of the ball is hindered.

  Also, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable entering port, the variable starting port in the second state can be placed in the second state unless the first variable entering port is in a state where the ball can enter in a special game. In this way, it is possible to allow the flowing game balls to enter the other entrances with priority. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the variable starting port does not enter the ball even when the variable starting port is in the second state as much as possible. Further, by arranging the second variable entrance port downstream of the variable starting port, the game ball enters the second variable entrance port based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable starting port. As the frequency changes, various game characteristics can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the above-mentioned special mode, it has a first special mode and a second special mode,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game has more game profit that can be acquired than the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as the stop display of the identification information for executing the special game. It has two special games. Then, the first special game is a special game having more game profits that can be acquired than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state), and the second special game is performed. Then, the second variable entrance is set to a state where the ball can enter.

  Specifically, first, in order to set the variable starting port to the second state (open state), the specific starting port related thereto is arranged at the uppermost stream among these entrance ports. Next, by arranging the first variable entrance port downstream of the specific starting port, the entry of the first special game with a large amount of game profit can be quickly performed, and a large number of game balls can be provided in a short period of time. Enable acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable entrance port, the variable state of the second state can be changed except in the special game where the first variable entrance port is in a state where the ball can enter. It becomes possible to allow a game ball to flow down into the starting port, preferentially to another ball input port. In addition, the second variable entrance, which can enter the ball in the second special game with a small game profit, is arranged downstream of the variable starting port, so that various game properties can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game.

As the first special mode and the second special mode, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, obtainable profit, and variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Equipped with a settable game state setting means,
In the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the variable starting opening disposed upstream of the game area, to the second variable ball entrance port disposed on the downstream side of the variable start hole By making entry difficult,
The first game state has a higher possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, in the first game state than in the second game state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the variable starting port is low, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering balls is higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which the second variable entrance can enter (open state) in the second special game, the second variable entrance is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the game is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 4-4, in the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 4-3,
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is larger than the game income acquired by entering the variable starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game profit (for example, a prize ball given when one game ball is entered) obtained by entering the game ball is set to the second or more than the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable starting port is less likely to be in the second state, the flowing game balls are likely to enter the second variable entrance on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, the ball easily enters the upstream variable starting port. Thereby, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable entrance where the game profit that can be obtained is larger than the variable starting port, and expects the second special game to occur in the first game state. Enhance the entertainment of the game. Further, by this, it is possible to make the obtainable game profit different when the same second special game occurs in the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game entertainment. Becomes

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the first game state. By generating a game, more game profit can be obtained.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are concurrently displayed. (Simultaneously) variable display is possible. Thereby, in the simultaneous fluctuation gaming machine (simultaneous fluctuation machine) which can simultaneously (variably) display the first identification information and the identification information, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming entertainment while enabling the smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of game states are provided as game states, and the execution of the big hit game triggers the normal state to a probable change state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine to shift. In addition, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are displayed for a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is returned. Such gaming machines have exhibited a certain effect of preventing the game from becoming tired by shifting the gaming state.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the gaming characteristics and enhances the gaming interest by giving the transition state of the gaming state a feature.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 includes:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
As the specific result, a first specific result is provided,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, in the high probability and the second game state, the number of times of the change display of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed. At the specific number of times, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As result of said identification, a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. Executing a common effect makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set at the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player Makes it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, this allows the player to expect the gaming state to change to the second gaming state with a high probability when the specified number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state having the higher probability and the first gaming state has a larger gaming profit that can be acquired than the gaming state having the higher probability and the second gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3,
The second starting port is provided upstream of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided downstream of the second starting port,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. The second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result,
A launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to a gaming area, and
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port is provided in a second game area in which game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter,
As the specific result, a first specific result is provided,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
Does not have the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification result is obtained as a result of a change display of the second identification information based on a ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a ball can be entered at a first firing intensity, and the second starting port is provided in a second game area where a ball can be entered at a second firing intensity. . Then, when the first identification result is obtained, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. Further, the result of the variable display of the first identification information does not have the first specification result, but has the first specification result as the result of the variable display of the second identification information. Thereby, different game characteristics can be provided depending on whether a game ball is inserted into the first start port and a case where a game ball is input into the second start port, and the game characteristics are diversified and the game entertainment is enhanced. It is possible to increase.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As result of said identification, a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state,
The second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on a ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, in the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the change display of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed. When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player Makes it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, this allows the player to expect the gaming state to change to the first gaming state with a high probability and the first gaming state when the specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 or 6-2.
A third identification result as the identification result;
When the third specified result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state does not change until the next specified result is obtained. It is a,
As a result variable display of the first identification information based on the input spheres to the first start hole, it is characterized in that it has a third identification result.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the game state after the end of the special game as the third specified result is set to the first game state with a high probability, the game state is maintained at the high probability and the first game state until the next specified result. Shall do. Accordingly, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is no change from the high probability and the second game state to the high probability and the first game state based on the change display of a specific number of times, and the special game end. After that, a game state that guarantees the game state of the first game state with high probability until the next specific result is obtained. Further, thereby, in a game involving the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state having the higher probability and the first gaming state has a larger gaming profit that can be acquired than the gaming state having the higher probability and the second gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4.
The second start hole provided on an upstream side of the second game region, the second variable inlet ball port is provided on the downstream side of the second start hole,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. The second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 6, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 7-1,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
A first identification result and a fourth identification result as the identification result;
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state as the first identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state as a fourth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

  In the present aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and a high probability. It changes to one game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times the variable display of the first identification information is performed, when the number of times of the variable display of the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state. May be changed to the first game state with high probability. Further, as another aspect, regardless of the number of times the variable display of the second identification information is performed, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the game state is set to a high probability and the second game. The state may be changed from the state to the first game state with high probability.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The identification result includes a second identification result and a fifth identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the fifth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of display is the second count, the game state is assumed to vary said predetermined probability and the first game condition,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. Executing a common effect makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second identification result, the first probability is set at the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of change display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state as the fifth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set at the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player Makes it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment. Further, by this, during execution of the common effect, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state when the first number has elapsed and when the second number has elapsed, It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
When the gaming state changes in the second number, it is more likely that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes in the second number than in the case in which the gaming state changes in the first number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is greater than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the timing of change of the gaming state is the second number than when it is the first number. The probability and the possibility of changing to the first game state are high. Thereby, when reaching the first number, the player plays the game in expectation that the gaming state is maintained without change, and reaches the second number with the gaming state kept in the second gaming state. In this case, a game is played with a high probability and an increased sense of expectation to change to the first game state. Thus, in the second game state, there is a point for increasing the sense of expectation a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
When the gaming state changes at the first number, it is more likely that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state than when the gaming state changes at the second number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to a number larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the timing of change of the gaming state is the first number than when it is the second number. It is highly probable and likely to change to the first gaming state. This allows the player to play a game with the expectation that the gaming state will change when the first number of times is reached, and is possible when the player reaches the second number of times while the gaming state remains in the second game state. Although the sex is lower than that of the first number, the game is played with a high probability and expecting to change to the first game state. Thus, in the second game state, there is a point for increasing the sense of expectation a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state having the higher probability and the first gaming state has a larger gaming profit that can be acquired than the gaming state having the higher probability and the second gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5,
The second starting port is provided upstream of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided downstream of the second starting port,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. The second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result,
A first condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition, a second condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition, A second identification information variation time determining means that can set
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter than the first condition state,
As the game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state; the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state; and the high probability and the first game state and the first condition It has two condition states and the high probability, the second game state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, a probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the second condition A second identification information variation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. The game state includes a predetermined probability and a first game state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, and a high probability. And a second game state and a second condition state. In the game state in which the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1,
The case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific result. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing, or increase the possibility of becoming an advantageous state after the end of the special game. is there. Accordingly, the player expects that the state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the time of the variable display of the second identification information is relatively short is set. To play the game. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
It has a third starting port where game balls can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on a ball entering the third starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the gaming machine is provided with a third starting port in which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entering of a game ball. As a result, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner by entering one of the variable type second starting port and the third starting port, so that it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second start port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port are a second game in which a game ball fired at the second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area to perform a game by variably displaying the first identification information. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is fired in the second game area, whereby the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , In the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game ball is fired in the second game area, and the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. It is assumed that the game is launched and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game.

  This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the player is expected to set a second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and Become. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port enter a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. Provided in a possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area to perform a game by variably displaying the first identification information. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is fired in the second game area, whereby the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game ball is fired in the second game area, and the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. It is assumed that the game is launched and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game.

  This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the player is expected to set a second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and Become. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-6 is a gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-5.
The high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are higher in the obtainable gaming profit than the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. I have. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with the expectation that the gaming state is set to the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-6,
The second start hole provided on an upstream side of the second game region, the second variable inlet ball port is provided on the downstream side of the second start hole,
In the high probability, in the second gaming state, and in the second condition state, a game ball is made to enter the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second starting port is positioned higher than the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entrance provided on the downstream side, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance is increased with the high probability and the second game. The state and the second game state have a higher probability than the second condition state, and the first game state and the second condition state are higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. With this, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state and the second condition state have a higher probability and the second state have a higher probability. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is higher than in the gaming state and the second condition state. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The game state includes the predetermined probability and the first game state, the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, and the high probability and the second game state. And
It said second variable ball entrance port is one game state, characterized in that the ball entrance frequency of the high probability and become the first game condition when the gaming ball is increased.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. The game state includes a predetermined probability and a first game state, a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, and a high probability and a second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable entrance increases with a high probability and in the first gaming state. Thereby, the player proceeds with the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first game state. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are second game areas in which game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, by playing a game ball in the first gaming area, the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is fired in the second game area. A gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second game area, the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game,
The frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. Is higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , In the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. Then, when the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. Further, when the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is fired in the second gaming area and the second identification information is transmitted. It is assumed that a game is played with the display being changed. In a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, that is, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, A game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable entrance is the highest is defined as a first game state with a high probability.

  Thus, when the player enters a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, the player proceeds with the game in expectation that the gaming state is a high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 9-3, the Reference Invention 9-1 or gaming machine Reference Invention 9-2,
The second start hole provided on an upstream side of the second game region, the second variable inlet ball port is provided on the downstream side of the second start hole,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine that can execute a special game that can give a predetermined profit to a player is provided. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for enhancing the player's expectation are performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information, thereby improving the gaming interest. Such effect, for example, information about the variation display of the identification information to be executed variable display and subsequent identification of currently executing (e.g., degree of expectation (reliability display result becomes specific display results), the display An effect of displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until a result is derived is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-239122).

  However, the effect performed during the variable display of the identification information as described above has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize an effect that can attract the interest of a player as an effect performed while the identification information is being changed and displayed. The aim is to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is as follows:
Variable display means capable of performing a variable display of identification information;
State control means capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
Information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect for displaying information about the game after the end of the change display during the change display of the identification information,
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current game state is continued after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a less favorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect execution means is capable of displaying at least two of the first to third information at the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the variable display of the identification information, when performing the information display effect to display information about the game after the end of the variable display, at the start of the information display effect, First information indicating that the special game is to be executed after the end, second information indicating that the current game state is to be continued after the end of the variable display, and It is also possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the game state is disadvantageous. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the fluctuation display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 described above.
When starting the information display effect, the information display effect execution means may display the first information and the second information, or may display the second information and the third information. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the first information and the second information are displayed and a case where the second information and the third information are displayed when the information display effect is started. Therefore, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can assume that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous, and the second When the information and the third information are displayed, it is not possible to exclude the possibility that a later game development is disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs up expectations and anxiety of the player.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above.
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
Examples gaming state, has at least a first game condition and the second game condition,
The second special game is a special game having more game profits that can be provided than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls a game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls a game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second game state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second game state is continued after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least a first special game and a second special game, and the game state has at least a first game state and a second game state. The game is a special game having more game profits that can be acquired than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In addition, the game state after the first special game ends is the first game state, and the game state after the second special game ends is the second game state. The information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is to be executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. For this reason, information (game development) after the game based on the game in the second game state (variation display of identification information) is displayed by the information display effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above.
It is provided with a fluctuation effect execution means capable of executing the fluctuation effect during the fluctuation display of the identification information,
The fluctuation effect execution means can execute a fluctuation effect based on a predetermined fluctuation effect pattern,
The variable effect pattern includes at least a first variable effect pattern, a second variable effect pattern, and a third variable effect pattern,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information is the specific display result, the second special game can be executed, and the change effect based on the first change effect pattern can be executed during the change display,
When the first special game is executable by the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern can be performed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display,
The information display effect execution means,
The first information and the second information can be displayed when a variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed,
When a fluctuation effect based on the second fluctuation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a variable effect based on the predetermined variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display of the identification information, and at least the first variable effect pattern and the second variable effect are used as the variable effect patterns. It has a pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, When the first special game can be executed by the result being the specific display result, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In such a case, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, when the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed, the information display in the variable display is performed. When the effect is started, the first information and the second information can be displayed. When a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect in the variable display. The second information and the third information can be displayed. For this reason, when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. This makes it possible to match the information display effect and the variable effect performed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the change display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the change display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be based on the subsequent information display mode. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the interest of the player as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a special game that can provide a predetermined game profit to a player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of a game such as a change display of identification information or a special game. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine that performs an effect (reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the change display of the identification information is a specific display result as a character effect of a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2016-154657).

  However, a configuration for performing a character effect in a reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to enhance the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a character effect by giving a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect. It is in.

A gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem includes:
Variable display means capable of performing a variable display of identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
And a performance performing means capable of performing a predetermined performance, comprising:
The effect executing means,
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there is a case where a character effect is executed in accordance with a change display of identification information, and a case where a character effect is executed in conjunction with a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect displayed by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information and a case where the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game. As a result, it is possible to provide a relevance between the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 described above.
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a game state when a change display of the identification information is performed to a specific game state,
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state at the time of performing the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed by the variation display of the identification information. , And may be executed in conjunction with a special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, a first specific display result and a second specific display result are included,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the change display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
The second special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result,
The first special game has more game profit that can be provided than the second special game,
The effect executing means,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the change display,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When it becomes possible, a character effect is executed in accordance with the change display, and the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the assumed second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. Thereby, the game entertainment in the case where the change display of the identification information, which is the trigger of execution of the first special game (the display result of the change display becomes the first specific display result), or the case where the second special game is performed, is provided. It is possible to increase.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 described above.
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the first variable entrance,
In the second special game, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance according to the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state,
The effect executing means,
In the specific game state, when the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the change display,
In the specific game state, when the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, entering of the game ball into the first variable entrance is performed. In the second special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance, and In the specific game state, the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance according to the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state. Thus, the second variable game associated with the second special game can be executed in a situation where the variable display of the identification information, which is an execution trigger of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result), can be executed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, and to enhance the interest in the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a display result of the variable display of the identification information is the first specific display result,
Probability of variable display of the display results of the identification information results second specific display is characterized in that higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, a predetermined probability, a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, as a probability (execution probability of the first special game) that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, Can be set, and the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game is executed increases, and accordingly, the possibility that the character effect accompanying the second special game is executed increases. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment when the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific game state, a probability that a display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is high, so that the possibility of performing the character effect accompanying the second special game is high. It is possible to attract the player's interest in executing the character effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information in a situation where the game is high. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
The character displayed on the predetermined display unit includes a first character and a second character,
The character production has a first character production and a second character production,
The first character effect is an effect that includes a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The effect executing means,
When performing character presentation with the variable display of the identification information to perform the first character presentation,
In the case where a character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and a character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect. The first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect that includes the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, a first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and a second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game. As a result, it is possible to execute the character effect in a mode suitable for the game situation, and to attract the interest of the player to the character effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 11, it is possible to enhance the gaming attraction of a gaming machine having a character effect by giving a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference Invention 12)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
A first countdown effect that displays a first effect image indicating a number in the first display area and counts down a number indicated by the first effect image;
A first suggestion effect indicating that the special game may be executed according to the end of the first countdown effect;
A second countdown effect that displays a second effect image indicating a number in the second display area and counts down the number indicated by the second effect image;
In response to the end of the second countdown effect, a second suggestion effect indicating that the special game is likely to be executed can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are compared, each effect image is displayed in a different display area, and when the countdown effect ends, a different suggestive effect. Can be performed. For this reason, as compared with the case where the display area of the effect image related to the countdown effect is one, or the case where one effect is performed in response to the end of the countdown, the effect variations are abundant, and as a result, It is possible to perform a highly entertaining effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1,
A display mode of the first effect image and a display mode of the second effect image are different from each other.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the display mode of the first effect image and the display mode of the second effect image are different from each other, for example, when the first countdown effect and the second countdown effect are simultaneously executed Even so, the player can clearly identify these countdown effects. For this reason, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the interest of the effect is reduced due to the player not being able to recognize that the two types of countdown effects are being executed simultaneously.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-1 or Reference Invention 12-2,
The effect control means,
The speed at which the number indicated by the first effect image is counted down can be different from the speed at which the number indicated by the second effect image is counted down.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the speed at which the number indicated by the first effect image is counted down and the speed at which the number indicated by the second effect image is counted down are different from each other, the effect is produced by performing the countdown effect many times. Becomes monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the amusement of the performance is reduced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-3,
The initial value of the number indicated by the second effect image is fixed, while the initial value of the number indicated by the first effect image is variable.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the initial value of the number indicated by the first effect image is variable, the first countdown effect is monotonous due to the fixed number, and as a result, It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the interest is reduced.

(Reference Invention 13)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a first specific effect indicating that the possibility that the special game is executed is relatively high,
When displaying the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode as the possibility suggestion image suggesting the possibility, the second display suggesting that the possibility is higher than the first display mode. Sometimes when displaying a possibility suggestion image of the aspect,
The first specific effect is more easily executed when the possibility suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image of the first display mode is displayed. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first specific effect is more easily executed when the possibility suggestion image in the second display mode is displayed than when the possibility suggestion image in the first display mode is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second display mode instead of the first display mode, and a synergistic effect between the effect displaying the possibility suggestion image and the first specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to obtain a high production effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1,
When the determination by the determination unit is performed, a symbol display control unit that stops and displays a symbol indicating a determination result of the determination unit after variably displaying a symbol in a predetermined symbol display unit,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a plurality of second specific effects different from the first specific effect, indicating that the possibility is relatively high,
When it is determined by the determination unit that the special game is to be performed, during the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects can be performed. While
When it is determined that the special game is not to be executed by the determination unit, during the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the determination, both the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed. This is characterized in that it is restricted from

  According to such a gaming machine, the first specific effect and the plurality of second specific effects are executed only when it is determined that the special game is to be executed. It is possible to make the player expect a plurality of second specific effects to be performed in addition to the first specific effect, and to obtain a higher effect by a synergistic effect of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Is possible.

(Reference Invention 14)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a stage effect of changing a predetermined stage effect image step by step,
When executing the stage effect, the stage effect image is displayed in a predetermined first display area to start the stage effect, and after the start of the stage effect, the stage effect image is referred to as the first display region. Is displayed in a different second display area to change the stage effect image.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image is displayed in the first display area when the stage effect is started, the player watching the first display region does not notice the start of the stage effect. Such a problem can be effectively suppressed. Further, after the stage effect is started, the stage effect image is displayed in the second display region instead of the first display region, so that it changes compared to the case where the display region where the stage effect image is displayed is fixed. It is possible to execute a stage production that is rich and interesting. After the stage effect is started, the stage effect image is displayed in the second display area instead of the first display area, so that another effect can be executed using the first display area, for example. Yes, a high stage effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the stage effect and other stages.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-1,
The stage effect image displayed in the first display region is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the second display region.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the stage effect image displayed in the first display area is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the second display area, the size of these effect images is the same. The player recognizes that the stage effect has been started, as compared with a case where the stage effect image displayed in the second display region is larger than the stage effect image displayed in the first display region. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress a problem that the stage effect is not originally obtained because the player does not notice that the stage effect has been started.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-1 or 14-2.
The stage effect is an effect that can be changed stepwise up to any stage equal to or less than the predetermined number of stages with a predetermined number of stages as an upper limit,
The effect control means,
In response to the stage effect having changed to the predetermined number of stages, a suggestion effect indicating that the special game is likely to be executed is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the stage effect changes to a predetermined number of stages, the suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, the player is expected to change the stage effect to the upper limit of the predetermined number of stages. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by a synergistic effect of the stage production and the suggestion production.

(Reference Invention 15)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
A notification effect executing means for executing a hit notification effect for notifying that it has been determined to execute the special game by the determining means, or a loss information effect for notifying that it has been determined not to execute the special game by the determining means. When,
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that the probability of the hit notification effect being performed is relatively high,
Performing an effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode and a second effect mode that indicates that the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode;
It is possible to foresee that the suggested effect will be executed by an effect performed in the second effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second effect mode is an effect mode that indicates that it is more likely that the hit notification effect is executed than the first effect mode, and is performed in the second effect mode. In some cases, the effect may be notified that the suggested effect is to be performed. For this reason, by executing the effect in the second effect mode, it is possible to expect the player to perform the suggestion effect and the hit notification effect, and it is possible to obtain a high effect.

Further, the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 15-2, in the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 15-1,
The effect control means,
As an effect performed in the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a stage effect that can be developed stepwise up to any stage equal to or less than the predetermined stage number with a predetermined stage number as an upper limit,
If the suggested effect is not performed, execute the stage effect that evolves to a stage less than the predetermined number of stages and ends,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the step effect that evolves to the predetermined number of steps and ends is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a stage effect that evolves to a predetermined number of stages and ends is performed during the second effect mode, a suggestion effect is executed. For this reason, it is possible to expect the player who expects the suggested effect to be executed to expect the stage effect to evolve to a predetermined number of stages. It is possible to obtain a production effect.

(Reference invention 16)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Symbol display control means for displaying a symbol variably displayed on a predetermined symbol display means and then stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result of the determination means,
And effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to display a change suggestion image indicating that the symbol is being displayed in a change display, and it is possible to execute a possibility suggestion effect indicating that the special game may be executed,
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed during the display of the change suggestion image, the possibility that the special game is executed from the first display mode of the change suggestion image is changed to the first display mode. It is possible to change the display mode to the second display mode indicating that the display mode is higher than the second display mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display mode of the change suggestion image may change from the first display mode to the second display mode as the possibility suggestion effect is executed. For this reason, by the synergy effect of the possibility suggestion effect and the change of the display mode of the change suggestion image, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the special game is executed, and as a result, , High effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1,
As the possibility suggestion effect is executed during the display of the change suggestion image, the display mode of the change suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. There is a second case that does not
It is characterized in that the probability of executing the special game is higher in the first case than in the second case.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display mode of the change suggestion image is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode along with the execution of the possibility suggestion effect, a special case is obtained as compared with a case where the change suggestion image does not change. The game is easy to be executed. For this reason, by performing the possibility suggestion effect, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the change suggestion image, and compared to a case where the display mode of the change suggestion image is changed regardless of the possibility suggestion effect, It is possible to obtain a higher production effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-1 or 16-2.
The possibility suggestion effect is a movement effect in which a plurality of characters move on the display screen,
The moving effect includes a moving effect of a first effect pattern in which the plurality of characters do not include a specific character, and a moving effect of a second effect pattern in which the plurality of characters include a specific character.
The effect control means,
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, it is possible to execute both the movement effect of the first effect pattern and the movement effect of the second effect pattern,
When the determining unit determines that the special game is not to be executed, the moving effect of the first effect pattern can be executed, while the execution of the moving effect of the second effect pattern is restricted. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, the movement effect of the first effect pattern can be executed both when it is determined to execute the special game and when it is determined not to execute the special game, while the second effect The movement effect of the pattern is not executed when it is determined not to execute the special game, but is executed when it is determined to execute the special game. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect that the moving effect of the second effect pattern is performed rather than the moving effect of the first effect pattern, and only the first effect pattern is prepared as the effect pattern of the moving effect. It is possible to execute a moving effect that has a wider variety of effects and a higher level of interest than when not performed.

(Reference Invention 17)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 is:
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Symbol display control means for displaying a symbol variably displayed on a predetermined symbol display means and then stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result of the determination means,
And effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
It is possible to display a change suggestion image that suggests that the pattern is being displayed for change,
During the display of the change suggestion image, a change effect of changing the change suggestion image to an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit can be performed,
A predetermined operation-response effect is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the display of the operation promotion image.

  According to such a gaming machine, a change effect in which the change suggestion image changes to the operation promotion image may be executed. For this reason, the change suggestion image has a function of suggesting that the pattern change display is being performed and a function of changing to the operation promotion image, and effectively enhances the interestingness of the effect using the change suggestion image. It is possible to do.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-1,
The reach effect performed during the fluctuation display of the symbol includes a first reach effect and a second reach effect that can be performed after the first reach effect.
The effect control means,
The change effect can be executed during the second reach effect, while the change effect is restricted from being executed during the first reach effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the change effect is not executed unless the change effect is developed to the second reach effect, it is more difficult to develop the second reach effect than when the change effect is not executed during the second reach effect. It is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-2,
Comprising a holding means capable of holding the right of judgment by the judgment means to a predetermined number,
The effect control means,
When the right of the determination is suspended, a suspended image indicating that fact is displayed,
Before the start of the second reach effect during the change display of the symbol, both the change suggestion image and the hold image are displayed, while during the second reach effect, the change image is displayed without displaying the hold image. A suggestion image is displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the second reach effect, the change suggestion image is displayed without displaying the hold image, and a change effect in which the change suggestion image changes to the operation promotion image is performed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change suggestion image as compared with the case where the hold image is displayed during the second reach effect. For example, it is possible that the player pays attention to the hold image. It is possible to easily suppress a problem that a change effect is overlooked due to a cause.

(Reference Invention 18)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 is:
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Symbol display control means for displaying a symbol variably displayed on a predetermined symbol display means and then stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result of the determination means,
And effect control means for controlling the effect based on the determination result of the determination means,
The effect control means,
During the change display of the symbol, a possibility suggestion image indicating that the special game may be executed is displayed, and the possibility suggestion image suggests the possibility in accordance with the operation of the operation means. The possibility suggestion image is changed so that the likelihood increases.

  According to such a gaming machine, the likelihood suggestion image changes so that the likelihood that the likelihood suggestion image suggests (special game is executed) increases according to the operation of the operation means. It is possible to make the player feel that the possibility of executing the special game is increased by himself, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect using the operation means.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-1,
The effect control means,
There are cases where the possibility suggestion image is changed with a first change pattern and cases where it is changed with a second change pattern,
The probability that the special game will be executed is different between the case where the possibility suggestion image changes in the first change pattern and the case where the possibility suggestion image changes in the second change pattern.

  According to such a gaming machine, the possibility of executing the special game is different from each other depending on the change pattern of the possibility suggestion image, so that the player can pay attention to how the possibility suggestion image changes. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a more effective effect of changing the possibility suggestion image.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-1 or Reference Invention 18-2,
The effect control means,
According to the operation of the operation means after changing the possibility suggestion image, a hit notification effect that notifies that the special game is executed, or a loss notification effect that notifies that the special game is not executed. It is characterized by executing.

  According to such a gaming machine, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means after changing the possibility suggestion image. For this reason, the player can operate the operating means while watching the changed possibility suggestion image and estimating the possibility of executing the special game.

(Reference Invention 19)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1 is:
Light emitting means;
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a symbol display control means for causing a symbol to be variably displayed on predetermined symbol display means and then stop displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a first reach effect and a second reach effect that can be performed after the first reach effect during the fluctuation display of the symbol,
When the second reach effect is executed during the change display of the symbol, the light emitting unit can emit light in a specific color corresponding to the second reach effect prior to the start of the second reach effect. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a gaming machine, the light-emitting means may emit light in a specific color, and the player can recognize in advance that the second reach effect is to be executed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player expect the second reach effect to be executed before the second reach effect is started, and to emit the second reach effect and the light emitting means in a specific color. A high effect can be obtained by a synergistic effect with the effect to be performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 19-1,
Comprising a holding means capable of holding the right of the determination up to a predetermined number,
The effect control means,
Before the determination is made on the right, the light emitting means can emit light in the specific color.

  According to such a gaming machine, the light emitting unit may emit light in a specific color before the variable display of the symbol in which the second reach effect is executed is started. For this reason, compared with the case where the light-emitting means emits light in a specific color between the time when the symbol variation display is started and the time when the second reach effect is started, the player can perform the second reach effect at an earlier stage. Is performed, and a higher effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 19-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 19-1 or 19-2.
The light emitting means is arranged in close proximity to a speaker that outputs effect sound,
The effect control means,
A specific effect sound is output from the speaker as the light emitting means emits light in the specific color.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific effect sound is output from the loudspeaker as the light emitting means emits light in the specific color, so that the player can see that the light emitting means emits light in the specific color. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player cannot recognize in advance that the second reach effect is executed due to the oversight.

(Reference Invention 20)
The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 20-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol on predetermined symbol display means, and then stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect,
The effect control means,
In the predetermined image display means, the effect symbols are variably displayed along with the change display of the special symbols, and the effect symbols indicating the results of the determination are stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbols,
During the special symbol change display, a suggestion effect indicating that the special game may be executed, and a first display control for changing and displaying the effect symbol in the first display area of the image display means. A second display control for variably displaying the effect symbols in a second display area different from the first display area of the image display means,
When the second display control is being executed, a notice effect that gives notice that the suggested effect is to be executed can be executed using a third display area different from the second display area of the image display means. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is variably displayed in the second display area of the image display means, using the third display area (different from the second display area) of the image display means, An announcement effect that indicates that a suggestion effect (which indicates that a special game may be executed) is to be executed is executed. For this reason, a notice effect can be performed without hindering the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and a highly interesting effect is performed by a synergistic effect between the effect of displaying the effect symbol and the effect of the notice effect. Is possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 20-1,
Comprising a holding means capable of holding the right of the determination up to a predetermined number,
The effect control means,
The notice effect is executed over a period in which the special symbol is variably displayed in a state where the right of the determination is suspended and a period in which the special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the determination. It is characterized by doing.

  According to such a gaming machine, the period in which the special symbol is variably displayed in a state where the right of determination is suspended, and the period in which the special symbol is variably displayed in response to the determination being made, , A notice effect is executed. For this reason, compared to the case where the preview effect is executed using only the latter period, the advance effect is less subject to time restrictions, and it is possible to execute a variety of advance effects in which the effect execution time is longer.

(Reference Invention 21)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 21-1 is:
Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol on predetermined symbol display means, and then stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect,
The effect control means,
In the predetermined image display means, the effect symbols are variably displayed along with the change display of the special symbols, and the effect symbols indicating the results of the determination are stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbols,
The effect design is configured to have identification information capable of distinguishing the effect design from other effect designs,
The effect control means,
Prior to the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination being stopped and displayed, it is possible to cause the effect symbol to be pseudo-stop-displayed,
When the effect symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed, the identification information constituting the effect symbol can be changed in a first direction different from the change direction in which the effect symbol has changed. Things.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed, the identification information constituting the effect symbol fluctuates in the first direction different from the fluctuating direction. It is possible for a person to easily recognize the effect, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the effect using the effect symbol as compared with a case where the effect symbol is simply stopped by simply swinging the effect symbol.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 21-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 21-1,
The effect design is configured to include the identification information and a decoration image,
The effect control means,
When the effect symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed, the identification information is changed in the first direction, and the decoration image is changed in a second direction different from the change direction and different from the first direction. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed, the identification information and the decoration image constituting the effect symbol fluctuate in different directions from each other. Thus, it is possible to improve the amusement of the effect using the effect symbol.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display section), 8 effect symbols, 20 first starting port, 21 second starting port, 30 first winning port, 35 second winning port, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect pending display, 103b fourth effect pending display.

Claims (1)

Determining means for determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
When the determination is performed, a special symbol display control means for variably displaying a special symbol on predetermined symbol display means, and then stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the result of the determination,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect,
The effect control means,
In the predetermined image display means, the effect symbols are variably displayed along with the change display of the special symbols, and the effect symbols indicating the results of the determination are stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbols,
The rendering symbol is identification information that can identify the rendering symbol from other rendering symbols, a first decoration image added to the identification information, and a second decoration image that is displayed as a background of the first decoration image and the identification information. And two decorative images,
The effect control means,
Prior to the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination being stopped and displayed, it is possible to cause the effect symbol to be pseudo-stop-displayed,
A first display control and a second display control subsequent to the first display control can be executed when the effect symbol that has been variably displayed is pseudo-stop-displayed;
The first display control is configured to rotate the identification information with a change direction in which the effect symbol has changed as an axial direction, swing the second decoration image in a direction different from the change direction, and (1) Display control for causing a decorative image to perform a predetermined effect operation,
The second display control, the identification information, the first decoration image, and to the second decoration image, Ri display control der to perform the rocking operation in common with each other,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a first reach effect and a second reach effect performed after the first reach effect during a single variation display of the special symbol,
During the first reach effect, the first reach effect is executed in a state in which a reach by the effect symbol having the identification information, the first decoration image, and the second decoration image is established. ,
When the second reach effect is started, the identification information, the first decoration image, and the second decoration image constituting the effect symbol are rotated with the change direction as the axial direction, and the identification information is rotated. And performing a separation effect of separating the first decoration image and the second decoration image,
When the separation effect is executed, the first decoration image and the second decoration image separated from the identification information are deleted,
During the second reach effect, in a state where the reach by the effect design that does not have the first decorative image and the second decorative image and that includes the identification information is established, the second reach image is displayed. game machine and wherein the Rukoto reach demonstration is executed.

Images